Menu

Romans 9:22 — Word Study

Depth

N1904Εἰ δὲ θέλων θεὸς ἐνδείξασθαι τὴν ὀργὴν καὶ γνωρίσαι τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ ἤνεγκεν ἐν πολλῇ μακροθυμίᾳ σκεύη ὀργῆς κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν,

BSAWhat ifei nowde desiringthelō <the>ho Godtheos [the one true deity, supreme Creator] to showendeiknumi theho wrathorgē [strong anger, opposition to sin] andkai to make knowngnōrizō theho powerdunatos [ability, capability] of Himautos borepherō [endured, tolerated] withen muchpolus patiencemakrothumia [longanimity, fortitude] [the] vesselsskeuos [containers, instruments] of wrathorgē [anger, judgment] fittedkatartizō [fitted, made ready] foreis destruction,apōleia [loss, perdition]

Word
Listen & take awayRomans 9
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 22 is in this chapter.
Greek ↓ Download MP3 Nestle 1904 — the very text on this page — read by Andy Martin in Erasmian pronunciation.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (apōleia) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Romans 9:22quick helps
In a sentencePaul poses a hypothetical question about God's patience towards those destined for destruction.
Who is speakingThe Apostle Paul, discussing God's sovereignty and justice.
Where we areThis verse is part of a larger argument about God's mercy and judgment in Romans 9.
The hard wordκαταρτίζω
Take awayGod's patience is evident even towards those who are ultimately rejected.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subjectθέλω verbθέλω The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Romans 9:22

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — God's Sovereignty and Mercygenerated

21Does not the potter have the right to make from the same lump of clay one vessel for special occasions and another for common use?
22What if God, intending to show His wrath and make His power known, bore with great patience the vessels of His wrath, prepared for destruction?
23What if He did this to make the riches of His glory known to the vessels of His mercy, whom He prepared in advance for glory—
24including us, whom He has called not only from the Jews, but also from the Gentiles?

Romans 9:22 is situated within a theological discussion about God's sovereignty in choosing whom to show mercy and whom to harden. Paul uses the metaphor of a potter to illustrate God's authority over His creation, emphasizing that He has the right to shape individuals for different purposes. This verse specifically highlights God's patience with those who are destined for destruction, indicating that His wrath is not immediate but is displayed over time.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Romans 9:17For the Scripture says to Pharaoh: “I raised you up for this very purpose, that I might display My power in you, and that My name might be proclaimed in all the earth.”
2Romans 1:18The wrath of God is being revealed from heaven against all the godlessness and wickedness of men who suppress the truth by their wickedness.
3Romans 2:4–5Or do you disregard the riches of His kindness, tolerance, and patience, not realizing that God’s kindness leads you to repentance?
4Exodus 9:16But I have raised you up for this very purpose, that I might display My power to you, and that My name might be proclaimed in all the earth.
5Psalm 90:11Who knows the power of Your anger? Your wrath matches the fear You are due.

The Key Word καταρτίζω, katartizōgenerated

The perfect passive participle καταρτίζω, built from kata (down) and artizō (to fit or equip). It means to prepare or make ready, often with the implication of completion or restoration.

In this verse, it describes the vessels that have been prepared for destruction, suggesting a state of readiness for judgment. The passive form indicates that these vessels have been acted upon, emphasizing God's role in their preparation.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The verse is rendered in the Berean Standard Bible as 'What if God, intending to show His wrath and make His power known, bore with great patience the vessels of His wrath, prepared for destruction?'. The KJV uses 'endured with much longsuffering', which emphasizes a similar idea of patience.

Where translations differ is in the rendering of specific Greek terms. For example, θέλων is translated as 'willing' in several versions, while μακροθυμίᾳ appears as 'patience' in the BSB but as 'longsuffering' in the KJV.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main verb of the verse is ἤνεγκεν, bore, which governs the entire sentence. It is supported by a series of clauses that describe God's intentions and the state of the vessels.

The structure includes a conditional clause introduced by εἰ, setting up the hypothetical situation. The sentence flows from God's intentions to the actions He takes regarding the vessels of wrath.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

σκεῦος appears in the Septuagint, where it is used to denote vessels or instruments, often in the context of sacred or significant objects. In this verse, it connects to the idea of being prepared for a specific purpose.

The term ἀπώλεια is also present in the Septuagint, conveying the sense of destruction or loss, which aligns with the theme of judgment in this passage.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Romans 9:22 asks what it means for God to show patience towards those who are destined for destruction. Paul illustrates God's sovereignty and justice, emphasizing that God has the right to shape individuals for different purposes, including those who are ultimately rejected.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does it mean that God bears with great patience?

It means that God shows forbearance and tolerance towards those who are destined for destruction, allowing time for repentance.

Why does Paul use the metaphor of vessels?

Paul uses the metaphor of vessels to illustrate God's authority and control over His creation, indicating that He can prepare some for honor and others for dishonor.

What is the significance of God's wrath in this context?

God's wrath signifies His righteous anger against sin and injustice, which will ultimately be revealed in judgment.

How does this verse relate to God's mercy?

This verse highlights the tension between God's justice and mercy, showing that while He is patient, there will be a time of reckoning for those who reject Him.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. In what ways have I experienced God's patience in my own life?
  2. How can I better understand the balance between God's mercy and His judgment?
  3. What does it mean to be a vessel prepared for honor or dishonor in my own life?
  4. How can I share the message of God's patience and justice with others?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Early Church Fathers provide insights on this verse, discussing God's nature and the implications of His wrath and mercy.

Origen of AlexandriaCOMMENTARY ON THE EPISTLE TO THE ROMANS c. 185–253
I am astonished when I examine the Holy Spirit’s purpose in the Scriptures. For he says that the wrath of God, which is foreign to his nature, will be made known to men … but that his goodness and mercy, which are proper to his nature,
Early Church Fathers on Romans 9 →
John ChrysostomHomily on Romans 16 c. 347–407
"What if God, willing to show His wrath, and to make His power known, endured with much long-suffering the vessels of wrath fitted to destruction: and that He might make known the riches of His glory on the vessels of mercy,
Early Church Fathers on Romans 9 →
Theodore of MopsuestiaPAULINE COMMENTARY FROM THE GREEK CHURCH c. 350–428
What Paul is saying is this: God has made this present life one of struggles and not of reward, and he agrees that wicked men and good ones alike will be tested in both good and bad things in order to have an exact touchstone for the…
Early Church Fathers on Romans 9 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Romans 9:22 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

What if God, willing to show his wrath,.... The apostle proceeds to clear God from any charge of cruelty and unmercifulness, by observing his conduct in time, both towards those he passes by, and

Read John Gill on Romans 9 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

What if God, willing to shew his wrath, and to make his power known, endured with much longsuffering the vessels of wrath fitted to destruction: What if God, willing to show ('designing to manifest')

Read Robert Jamieson on Romans 9 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

In this and in the next verse, is a real answer to the cavil in . The apostle having spoken before of God’ s absolute right and power over his creatures, to dispose of them at his pleasure, as the potter doth his clay; lest any should tax God with tyranny and partiality towards his creatures, he subjoineth the reasons of his different proceedings with the one and with the other. q.d. What hast thou to answer or object against God, if he take a severe course with some? Seeing: 1. He thereby manifesteth his great displeasure against sin, and his power to take vengeance of sinners. Seeing: 2. He bears long with them in their sins; exerciseth great patience towards them in the midst of their…

Read Matthew Poole on Romans 9 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

22 What if God, willing to shew his wrath, and to make his power known, endured with much longsuffering the vessels of wrath fitted to destruction: Ver. 22. Fitted to destruction] Non dicit Deum eos aptasse ad interitum, ne videretur dicere Deum eis indidisse peccatum, quo ad exitum praeparentur. (Molinaeus.)

Read John Trapp on Romans 9 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(22-29) These verses supply the concluding section of the vindication. All this scheme of God’s dealings, apparently so severe, is really most merciful. To those who really deserved His wrath, He showed longsuffering. While for us who now believe, Gentiles as well as Jews, He had mercy and glory in store. But in both cases the final result was strictly in accordance with prophecy. Hosea had foretold the admission of the Gentiles. Isaiah the exclusion of the greater part of the Jews.

Read Charles John Ellicott on Romans 9 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 22. What if God, willing to show his wrath] The apostle refers here to the case of Pharaoh and the Egyptians, and to which he applies Jeremiah's parable of the potter, and, from them, to the then state of the Jews. Pharaoh and the Egyptians were vessels of wrath-persons deeply guilty before God; and by their obstinate refusal of his grace, and abuse of his goodness, they had fitted themselves for that destruction which the wrath, the vindictive justice of God, inflicted, after he had endured their obstinate rebellion with much long-suffering; which is a most absolute proof that the hardening of their hearts, and their ultimate punishment, were the consequences of their obstinate…

Read AdamClarke on Romans 9 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

22. What if God, &c.] The Gr. construction in Romans 9:22-23 is broken and peculiar. Rendered nearly lit., the verses run: But if God, choosing to demonstrate His wrath, and make known what He can do, bore with much longsuffering vessels of wrath, fitted unto ruin; and that He might make known the wealth of His glory on vessels of mercy, which He fore-prepared unto glory? The general drift of the passage, though thus grammatically peculiar, is yet clear.—The “but” suggests a certain difference between the potter’s work and that of the Creator and Judge; q. d., “If the potter’s right is so absolute, while the clay is mere matter and so has no demerit, the right of God over guilty humanity is…

Read Cambridge on Romans 9 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

What if God ... - If God does what the apostle supposes, what then? Is it not right? This is the second point in the answer to the objection in Romans 9:19.

Read Albert Barnes on Romans 9 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

What if God, intending to show His wrath and make His power known, bore with great patience the vessels of His wrath, prepared for destruction?

WEBWorld English Bible2000

What if God, willing to show his wrath and to make his power known, endured with much patience vessels of wrath prepared for destruction,

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

What if God, intending to show His wrath and make His power known, bore with great patience the vessels of His wrath, prepared for destruction?

NETBNew English Translation2006

But what if God, willing to demonstrate his wrath and to make known his power, has endured with much patience the objects of wrath prepared for destruction?

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

What if God, willing to shew his wrath, and to make his power known, endured with much longsuffering the vessels of wrath fitted to destruction:

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

What if God, willing to show his wrath, and to make his power known, endured with much longsuffering vessels of wrath fitted unto destruction:

RVARevised Version, American1894

What if God, willing to shew his wrath, and to make his power known, endured with much longsuffering vessels of wrath fitted unto destruction:

NWBWebster's Bible1833

What if God, willing to show his wrath, and to make his power known, endured with much long-suffering the vessels of wrath fitted to destruction:

GNVGeneva Bible1599

What and if God would, to shewe his wrath, and to make his power knowen, suffer with long patience the vessels of wrath, prepared to destruction?

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

And if God, minded to shew his wrath and to make his power known, endured with much long-suffering vessels of wrath fitted for destruction;

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

And if God, willing to shew the wrath and to make known His power, did endure, in much long suffering, vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

And if God, willing to show the wrath and to make known His power, endured, in much long suffering, vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

What if God, who is willing to show his wrath and to make his power known, endured with much patience containers of wrath prepared for destruction?

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

What if God, willing to shew his wrath, and to make his power known, endured with much patience vessels of wrath, fitted for destruction,

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

It's as if God, wanting to demonstrate his opposition to sin and to reveal his power, bears patiently with these “pots destined for destruction,”

BBEBible in Basic English1949

What if God, desiring to let his wrath and his power be seen, for a long time put up with the vessels of wrath which were ready for destruction:

Word by word, the decisions they made

θέλωνthelō desiring G2309 2 different renderings
willingASV DRA KJV LSV NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
desiringBBE
ἐνδείξασθαιendeiknumi to show G1731 2 different renderings
to showASV BSB LSV MSB NWB ULB WEB
didYLT
ὀργὴνorgē wrath G3709 2 different renderings
wrathASV BBE BSB DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
opposition to sinFBV
ἤνεγκενpherō bore G5342 2 different renderings
enduredASV DBY DRA KJV LSV NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB
boreBSB MSB
πολλῇpolus much G4183 2 different renderings
muchASV DBY DRA KJV LSV NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
greatBSB MSB
μακροθυμίᾳmakrothumia patience G3115 2 different renderings
patienceBSB DRA GNV MSB NETB ULB WEB
longsufferingASV KJV RVA

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseδὲnowclauseεἰWhat ifclauseclausenoun phrase · subject-ΘεὸςGodclause · adverbialverbθέλωνdesiringclause · objectclauseverbἐνδείξασθαιto shownoun phrase · objectτὴνtheὀργὴνwrathκαὶandclauseverbγνωρίσαιto make knownnoun phrase · objectτὸthenoun phraseδυνατὸνpowerαὐτοῦof Himverbἤνεγκενboreprepositional phrase · adverbialἐνwithnoun phraseπολλῇmuchμακροθυμίᾳpatiencenoun phrase · objectnoun phraseσκεύη[the] vesselsὀργῆςof wrathadjective phraseclauseverbκατηρτισμέναhaving been fittedprepositional phrase · adverbialεἰςforἀπώλειανdestructionκαὶalsoclauseἵναthatclauseverbγνωρίσῃHe might make knownnoun phrase · objectτὸνthenoun phraseπλοῦτονrichesnoun phraseτῆςof thenoun phraseδόξηςgloryαὐτοῦof Himprepositional phrase · adverbialἐπὶuponnoun phrasenoun phrasenoun phrasenoun phraseσκεύη[the] vesselsἐλέουςof mercyclauseobjectwhichverbπροητοίμασενHe prepared beforehandprepositional phrase · adverbialεἰςforδόξανgloryclauseobjectοὓςwhomadverbialκαὶevenverbἐκάλεσενHe has calledἡμᾶςusprepositional phrase · adverbialοὐnotprepositional phraseμόνονonlyprepositional phraseἐξout fromἸουδαίων[the] Jewsἀλλὰbutprepositional phraseκαὶalsoprepositional phraseἐξout fromἐθνῶν[the] Gentiles

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Quod si Deus volens ostendere iram, et notum facere potentiam suam, sustinuit in multa patientia vasa iræ, apta in interitum,

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܐܢ ܕܝܢ ܨܒܐ ܐܠܗܐ ܕܢܚܘܐ ܪܘܓܙܗ ܘܢܘܕܥ ܚܝܠܗ ܐܝܬܝ ܒܣܘܓܐܐ ܕܡܓܪܬ ܪܘܚܗ ܪܘܓܙܐ ܥܠ ܡܐܢܐ ܕܪܘܓܙܐ ܕܓܡܝܪܝܢ ܠܐܒܕܢܐ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

Εἰ δὲ θέλων θεὸς ἐνδείξασθαι τὴν ὀργὴν καὶ γνωρίσαι τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ ἤνεγκεν ἐν πολλῇ μακροθυμίᾳ σκεύη ὀργῆς κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν,

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

Εἰ δὲ θέλων θεὸς ἐνδείξασθαι τὴν ὀργὴν καὶ γνωρίσαι τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ ἤνεγκεν ἐν πολλῇ μακροθυμίᾳ σκεύη ὀργῆς κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν,

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

Εἰ δὲ θέλων θεὸς ἐνδείξασθαι τὴν ὀργὴν καὶ γνωρίσαι τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ ἤνεγκεν ἐν πολλῇ μακροθυμίᾳ σκεύη ὀργῆς κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν,

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

Εἰ δὲ θέλων θεὸς ἐνδείξασθαι τὴν ὀργὴν καὶ γνωρίσαι τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ ἤνεγκεν ἐν πολλῇ μακροθυμίᾳ σκεύη ὀργῆς κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν,

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

Εἰ δὲ θέλων θεὸς ἐνδείξασθαι τὴν ὀργὴν καὶ γνωρίσαι τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ ἤνεγκεν ἐν πολλῇ μακροθυμίᾳ σκεύη ὀργῆς κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν,

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

Εἰ δὲ θέλων θεὸς ἐνδείξασθαι τὴν ὀργὴν καὶ γνωρίσαι τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ ἤνεγκεν ἐν πολλῇ μακροθυμίᾳ σκεύη ὀργῆς κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν,

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

Εἰ δὲ θέλων θεὸς ἐνδείξασθαι τὴν ὀργὴν καὶ γνωρίσαι τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ ἤνεγκεν ἐν πολλῇ μακροθυμίᾳ σκεύη ὀργῆς κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν,

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

Εἰ δὲ θέλων θεὸς ἐνδείξασθαι τὴν ὀργὴν καὶ γνωρίσαι τὸ δυνατὸν αὐτοῦ ἤνεγκεν ἐν πολλῇ μακροθυμίᾳ σκεύη ὀργῆς κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν,

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse all agree
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

Every edition agrees. All 8 printed editions — Nestle-Aland 28, Nestle-Aland 27, SBLGNT, Westcott-Hort, Tregelles, Tyndale House 2017, Textus Receptus (KJV), Byzantine majority — carry every word of this verse, in the same order, with no difference that any translator would render differently.


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Romans 9:22εἰWhat ifWhat ifεἰδέnownowδέθέλωdesiringdesiringθέλω<the><the>θεόςGodGodθεόςἐνδείκνυμιto showto showἐνδείκνυμιthetheὀργήwrathwrathὀργήκαίandandκαίγνωρίζωto make knoto make knownγνωρίζωthetheδυνατόςpowerpowerδυνατόςαὐτόςof Himof Himαὐτόςφέρωboreboreφέρωἐνwithwithἐνπολύςmuchmuchπολύςμακροθυμίαpatiencepatienceμακροθυμίασκεῦος[the] vesse[the] vesselsσκεῦοςὀργήof wrathof wrathὀργήκαταρτίζωfittedfittedκαταρτίζωεἰςforforεἰςἀπώλειαdestructiondestruction,ἀπώλειαὀρέγωv. I stretv. I stretch foὀρέγωεἰ δὲ μήNeg.prt. bNeg.prt. but ifεἰ δὲ μήἐνPrep. in, Prep. in, on, aἐνδύναμαιv. I am pov. I am powerfuδύναμαιεἰςPrep. intoPrep. into, in,εἰςκατάPrep. downPrep. down fromκατάArticle thArticle theγινώσκωv. I come v. I come to knγινώσκωἀήρn.m. airn.m. airἀήρἑαυτοῦRefl.pr. hRefl.pr. himselἑαυτοῦἐκPrep. fromPrep. from out,ἐκμακροθύμωςAdv patienAdv patientlyμακροθύμωςἀπόλλυμιv. I destrv. I destroy, lἀπόλλυμιθυμόςn.m. an oun.m. an outbursθυμόςὀμνύωv. I swearv. I swear, takὀμνύωδυνατόςAdj powerfAdj powerful, aδυνατόςἀγνοέωv. I do nov. I do not knoἀγνοέωκαθαρίζωv. I make v. I make cleanκαθαρίζω
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Romans 9:22

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

What if now desiring <the> God to show the wrath and to make known the power of Him bore with much patience [the] vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,
Εἰei What if G1487 Conditional particle
501× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means 'if' and is used to express conditions or questions. It appears in many Bible verses, such as Matthew 11:14 and Romans 8:25, introducing a condition or hypothesis.
Tyndale gloss
if
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word εἰ, transliterated as ei, is a primary conditional particle meaning 'if' or 'whether.' It is used in various contexts, including conditions, indirect questions, and expressions of wishes. In the New Testament, it appears frequently, often followed by different verb tenses to indicate various conditions. The lexicons do not present significant disagreement on its usage.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰ,

conjunctive particle, used in conditions and in indirect questions.

Conditional, if;

c. indic., expressing a general assumption;

pres.: seq. indic, pres., Mt 11:14, Ro 8:25, al.; seq. imperat., Mk 4:23 9:22, Jo 15:18, I Co 7:9, al.; seq. fut. indic., Lk 16:31, Ro 8:11, al.; seq. pf. or aor., with negation in apodosis, Mt 12:26, Ro 4:14, al.; similarly, seq. impf., Lk 17:6, Jo 8:39; seq. quæst.,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰ 109 εἰ WH, s0 Trin Mt. xii. 41; Ὀζείας L T Tr WH; Πειλᾶτος T WH; Σεμεείν T Tr WH; Ταβειθά WH; Χερουβείν 1, T Tr WH (-βίμ RG); Χοραζείν T Tr WH; ἀφείδεια L; εἰδέα T Tr WH; ἐπαρχεία T WH; ἐπιπόθεια WH; ἡλεί T ; πανοικεί TWH; ῥαββεί T WH; ῥαββουνεί WH; σαβαχθανεί Tr WH; ταλειθά WH; τάχειον WH; τραπεζείτης T WH.| el, is first a conditional particle, ἐγ (Lat. si) ; secondly, an interrogative particle, whether, (Lat. an, num, ne). I. εἰ CoNDITIONAL (on the difference between it and ἐάν, see ἐάν, I. 1 b.) is connected, according to the variety of conditions, with various tenses and moods; viz. ἘΣ with the Indicative of all tenses, when anything is simply and generally assumed to be, or to be done, or to have been done, or to be about to be, (W. § 41 b., 2; ef. 42, 2; [Β. 220(190)]). a. withthe Ind. Present; a. foll. in the apodosis by the ind. pres.: Mt. xix. 10 (εἰ οὕτως ἐστὶν ἡ αἰτία...…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ΕἸ , J ἐκπλησσω γὰρ τὸ ἀγαθὸν τοῦ ἀστέρος καὶ εἰς τὸ ἐναντίον ἐκπίπτει. See also Michel 827 A (mid. 11,8.0.) τό τε νόμισμα τὸ ἐκπεπτωκὸς ἀριθμῶι, of coins that have fallen out of use. The verb is not infrequent with reference to crops that “fall to be included”’ in the produce of a particular year, eg. BGU II. 5915" (A.p. 56-7) βουλόμεθα μισθώσασθαι τοὺς ἐκπεπτωκότας εἰς τὸ τρίτον ἔτος Νέρωνος. . . φοινεικίνους καρπούς, P Fay ο115 (A.p. 99) ἐϊλαϊκοὺς καρποὺς ἐκπεππτωκότας (/. ἐκπεπτωκ --Ἰ εἰς τὸ ἐνεστὸ(ς) τρίτον ἔτος. Cf. P Hib I. γ810 (B.c. 244--3) a letter requesting that two persons should be released from some public service—81a τὸ μὴ ἐκπεσίεῖν αὐτοῖς τὸ viv λειτουργῆσαι, ‘because it is not at present their turn to serve,’’ where the editors point out that éxmec[et]v, which has been corrected in the papyrus, is practically equivalent to προσπέσηι in 1.4 of the same document. For the…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰ (ei) — if.

εἰ,

Attic dialect-Ionic dialect and [Refs 4th c.AD+] ἤ [Refs] in Epic dialect:— Particle used interjectionally with imperative and to express a wish, but usually either in conditions, if, or in indirect questions, whether. In the former use its regular negative is μ; in the latter, οὐ.

__A INTERJECTIONALLY, in [Refs 8th c.BC+], come now! with imperative, εἰ δὲ.. ἄκουσον [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A.2 in wishes, with optative, ἀλλ᾽ εἴ τις.. καλέσειεν [Refs]; so later, εἴ μοι ξυνείη μοῖρα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of unattained wishes, in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; later with past tenses of indicative, εἰ γάρ μ᾽ ὑπὸ γῆν.. ἧκεν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; εἰ γὰρ τοσαύτην δύναμιν εἶχον ὥστε.. [Refs 8th c.BC+]infinitive (compare the use of infinitive in commands), αἰ γὰρ τοῖος ἐὼν.. ἐμὸς γαμβρὸς καλέεσθαι…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰ

ei

a primary particle of conditionality; if, whether, that,

etc.:--forasmuch as, if, that, (al-)though, whether. Often used in

connection or composition with other particles, especially as in 1489,

1490, 1499, 1508, 1509, 1512, 1513, 1536, 1537. See also 1437.

see GREEK for 1489

see GREEK for 1490

see GREEK for 1499

see GREEK for 1508

see GREEK for 1509

see GREEK for 1512

see GREEK for 1513

see GREEK for 1536

see GREEK for 1537

see GREEK for 1437

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰ

Cond.

if

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἰ ei 502x

if, Mt. 4:3, 6; 12:7; Acts 27:39, freq.; since, Acts 4:9; whether, Mk. 9:23; Acts 17:11; that, in certain expressions, Acts 26:8, 23; Heb. 7:15; by a suppression of the apodosis of a sentence, εἰ serves to express a wish; O if! O that! Lk. 19:42; 22:42; also a strong negation, Mk. 8:12; Heb. 3:11; 4:3; εἰ καί, if even, though, although, Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
COND — Conditional particle
conditional particle — it marks the clause as a condition.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

COND CONDitional particle or conjunction

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
74%if
if74% · 388×only17% · 89×whether3% · 14×lest3% · 14×other renderings3% · 17×

522 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 12 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial7%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 501 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδίδωμιI offer, giveἐπερωτάωI interrogate, q
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἄρτοςbread, a loaf, fδίδωμιI offer, give
ὅτιthat, since, because
ΒηθσαϊδάPropγινώσκωI come to know, σύ
σύ
ἐνλέγωI say, speakἐπερωτάωI interrogate, q
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςἐγώ
εἰWhat if501×
what comes after →
δέbut, on the other ha
τὶςArticle theεἰ δὲ μήNeg
μήNeg
Article theἐνεἷςone
τὶς
θέλωI will, wish, deδοκέωI think, seem, aἔχωI have, hold, po
γάρfor
Article theπιστεύωI believe, have διά
Article the
θεόςGod, a godΣατανᾶςan adversary, Saδεξιόςon the right han

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰ · 501× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians Matthew Luke John Romans 2 Corinthians Acts Mark Galatians Hebrews Revelation 1 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament25 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 307 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

What if now desiring <the> God to show the wrath and to make known the power of Him bore with much patience [the] vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,
δὲde now G1161 Conjunction
2,787× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This is a conjunction that means and, but, or then, used to connect ideas like in Matthew 1:2 and 2 Corinthians 6:15.
Tyndale gloss
then
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),

post-positive conjunctive particle;

copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δέ (de) — then.

δέ,

but: adversative and copulative Particle,

I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. without preceding μέν,

II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. copulative,

II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δέ

de

a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,

etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δέ

Cj.

but, on the other hand, and

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δέ de 2x

a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.

δέ is often redundant,

to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.

to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.

POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%now
now33% · 974×however27% · 780×then21% · 620×and12% · 360×but5% · 154×other renderings2% · 49×

2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existσύ
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπεντακισχίλιοιfive thousand
εἰCond
παλαιόςold, ancient, woσύεἰμίI am, exist
εἰμίI am, exist
περιπατέωI walk, conduct ἀναπίπτωI lie down, reclμνημεῖονa tomb, sepulche
οὗτος
δίδωμιI offer, giveθεόςGod, a godπίστιςfaith, belief, t
δέnow2787×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusθεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐπί
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theσύ
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὗτοςἸωάννηςJohn
τὶς
Article theαὐτόςὄνομαname, character,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδέ · 2,787× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John Mark Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians James 1 Timothy

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
What if now desiring <the> God to show the wrath and to make known the power of Him bore with much patience [the] vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,
θέλωνthelō desiring G2309 Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
207× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To will or desire something, as seen in Romans 9:16 and 1 Corinthians 12:6, where it describes a person's intentional choice or preference. This word is about making a conscious decision.
Tyndale gloss
to will/desire
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

θέλω (thelō) means to will, wish, or desire. It is a common verb in the New Testament, often expressing intention or resolution, and can appear in various constructions, such as with an infinitive or an accusative. The lexicons note its frequent use compared to similar verbs and highlight its role in expressing personal desire or divine will, but they do not indicate significant disagreements among them.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

θέλω (the strengthened form ἐθέλω is found in Hom., and is the more freq. in Attic; v. Rutherford, NPhr., 415 f.),

[in LXX for חפץ ,אבה; c. neg., מאן pi., etc.;]

to will, be willing, wish, desire (more freq. than βούλομαι, q.v., in vernac. and late Gk., also in MGr.; for various views as to its relation to β., v. Thayer, 286; but v. also Bl., §24, s.v.): absol., Ro 9:16, I Co 4:19 12:18, Ja 4:15; τ. θεοῦ θέλοντος, Ac 18:21; c. acc. rei, Mt 20:21, Mk 14:36, Jo 15:7, Ro 7:15, 16, I Co 4:21 7:36, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

θέλω (only in this form in the N. T.; in Grk. auth. also ἐθέλω [Veitch 5. v.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 7; B. 57 (49)]); impf. ἤθελον ; [fut. 3 pers. sing. θελήσει, Rev. xi. 5 WII mrg.]; 1 aor. ἠθέλησα; (derived apparently fr. dey with a fuller aspiration, so that it means prop. to seize with the mind; but Curtius p. 726, ed. 5, regards its root as uncertain [he inclines, however, to the view of Pott, Fick, Vanicek and others, which connects it with a root meaning to hold to]); Sept. for 728 and yan; To WILL, (have in mind,) intend; i. e. 1. to be resolved or determined, to purpose: absol., ὁ θέλων, Ro. ix. 16; τοῦ θεοῦ θέλοντος if God will, Acts xviii. 21; ἐὰν ὁ κύριος θελήσῃ (in Attic ἐὰν θεὸς θέλῃ, ἣν οἱ θεοὶ θέλωσιν [ ef. Lob. u.s.]), 1 Co. iv. 19; Jas. ἵν. 15; καθὼς ἠθέλησε, 1 Co. xii. 18; xv. 38; τί, Ro. vii. 15 sq. 19 sq.; 1 Co. vii. 36; Gal. v.17; with the aorist inf., Mt. xx. 14…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

θέλω. For the form ἐθέλω, which is wanting in the NT as in the LXX, Nageli (p. 57) refers to the magic papyri and to the poetic 7J/de 111. 1064: it is common in the Attic inscrr. up to the end of iv/B.c., but from B.C. 250 θέλω occurs, and eventually takes its place as the regular form in the Kow (cf. Meisterhans G7. p. 178). For the verb denoting a personal wish or desire we may cite P Petr I. ταῦ (a Will) τὰ [ἐμαυτοῦ διοικεῖν ὡς ἐ]γὼ θέλω, P Oxy VIT. τοῦτ" (B.c. 22) od BE ypade ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐὰν θέλῃς (ci Mt 85), 726. III. 531° (ii/A.p.) περὶ ὧν θέλεις δήλωσόν μοι, P Cairo Preis 48° (ii/A.D.) τὸ μὲν πλοῖόν σοι, ὡς ἠθέλησας, σκέψομαι, and the constant epistolary phrase γινώσκειν σε θέλω, as in P Oxy IV. 74377 (B.c. 2) ὥστ᾽ ἂν τοῦτό σε θέλω γεινώσκειν ὅτι ἐγὼ αὐτῴ διαστολὰς δεδώκειν τὸ βαδίσαι εἰς Τακόνα, ‘I wish you therefore to know…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

θέλω (thelō) — to will/desire.

θέλω,

see at {ἐθέλω} and add ὅστις ἂν θέλῃ [Refs]

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

θέλω

v.

I will, wish, desire

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

θέλω thelō 208x

to exercise the will, properly by an unimpassioned operation; to be willing, Mt. 17:4; to be inclined, disposed, Rom. 13:3; to choose, Lk. 1:62; to intend, design, Lk. 14:28; to will, Jn. 5:21; 21:22; ἤθελον, I could wish, Gal. 4:20

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-NSM — Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
9%desiring
desiring9% · 18×i desire5% · 10×wishing4% · 9×willing4% · 8×i want3% · 7×do you desire3% · 7×desires3% · 7×shall desire3% · 7×other renderings65% · 138×

211 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 89 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 207 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,ὅςλέγωI say, speak
ἐάνCond
ὅςγάρforκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
Article the
καίand, even, also,γραμματεύςa scribe, town-cὅπωςhow, in order th
ὅς
γάρforβασιλεύςa king, ruler, eἐγώ
τίςIrg
αὐτόςλέγωI say, speakΠιλᾶτοςPilate
θέλωdesiring207×
what comes after →
δέbut, on the other ha
σύπᾶςall, the whole, οὗτος
Article the
ψυχήthe soul, life, θέλημαwill, wish, desiθεόςGod, a god
ποιέωI do, make
Article theὧδεhereἐν
αὐτός
ἀποκτείνωI put to death, δειγματίζωI hold up as an λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also, nam
οὐNegἰάομαιI healδίδωμιI offer, give

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceθέλω · 207× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Acts Galatians 2 Corinthians Revelation Hebrews 1 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament22 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 61 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 104c. AD 40

τῇ δ’ ἕκτῃ περὶ πάντα καταρτύεται νόος ἀνδρός, οὐδ’ ἕρδειν ἔθ’ ὁμῶς ἔργ’ ἀπάλαμνα θέλει·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.9c. AD 75–95

τούτῳ δὴ πειθόμενος ὡς αἰεὶ τοῖς χρήσιμον ἢ καλόν τι πράττειν δυναμένοις συμφιλοκαλοῦντι καὶ ἐμαυτὸν αἰσχυνόμενος, εἰ δόξαιμι ῥαθυμίᾳ πλέον ἢ τῷ περὶ τὰ κάλλιστα χαίρειν πόνῳ, προθυμότερον ἐπερρώσθην, ἔτι κἀκεῖνα πρὸς τοῖς εἰρημένοις λογισάμενος οὐ…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.9c. AD 100

αἰσθάνεσθαι οὖν ὀφείλομεν, μὴ ὄντες ἀσύνετοι, τὴν γνώμην τῆς ἀγαθωσύνης τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, ὅτ̓ ἡμῖν λέγει, θέλων ἡμᾶς μὴ ὁμοίως πλανωμένους ἐκείνοις ζητεῖν, πῶς προσάγωμεν αὐτῷ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Edg. $1Alexandria (?)252 BC

αὐτός τε ἔρρωσαι καὶ τὰ ἄλλα σοί ἐστιν κατὰ νοῦν, εἴη ἂν ὡς ἐγὼ θέλω· ὑγίαινον δὲ καὶ αὐτός. ἐγραψέν μοι Μαιανδρία ὅτι χλαμύδα αὐτὴν κελεύεις ἐξυφᾶναι. νυνὶ μὲν

P.Cair. Zen. 3 59478276 BC–227 BC

αὐτός τε ἔρρωσαι καὶ τὰ λοιπά σοι κατὰ γνώμην ἐστίν, εἴη ἂν ὡς ἐγὼ θέλω· ὑγίαινον δὲ καὶ αὐτός. ἀπέσταλκά σοι κομίζοντα Πολέμωνα χοιρίδιον τριακονθήμερον α καὶ χαλκῶν δραχμὰς

P.Cair. Zen. 4 59575276 BC–227 BC

σὺ καὶ οὕς βούλει καὶ τὰ λοιπὰ κατὰ νοῦν ἐστιν, γένοιτʼ ἂν ὡς ἡμεῖς θέλομεν. ἱκανῶς δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ἔχομεν, καί σου μνημονεύομεν ἐν παντὶ καιρῶι, ὥσπερ καὶ προσῆκόν

What if now desiring <the> God to show the wrath and to make known the power of Him bore with much patience [the] vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,
ho <the> G3588 Article · nominative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

What if now desiring <the> God to show the wrath and to make known the power of Him bore with much patience [the] vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,
θεὸςtheos God G2316 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
1,311× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word simply means God, referring to the one true deity. It is used throughout the New Testament, including in Matthew 27:46 and Acts 14:11, to describe the supreme being and creator of the universe.
Amplified meaning
the one true deity, supreme Creator
Tyndale gloss
God
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

θεός (theos) means 'God' or 'a god' and is used in both singular and plural forms. It refers to the supreme deity in monotheistic contexts, as well as to lesser deities in polytheistic settings. The New Testament frequently employs this term, notably in verses like Matthew 27:46 and Acts 19:37. Some lexicons note its use as a title for rulers or magistrates, reflecting its broader application in ancient texts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

θεός, -οῦ, ὁ, ἡ (Ac 19:37 only; v. M, Pr., 60, 244), late voc., θεέ (Mt 27:46; cf. De 3:24, al.),

[in LXX chiefly for אֱלֹהִים, also for אֵל and other cognate forms, יהוה, etc.;]

a god or deity, God.

In polytheistic sense, a god or deity: Ac 28:6, I Co 8:4, II Th 2:4, al.; pl., Ac. 14:11 19:26, Ga 4:8, al.

Of the one true God;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

θεός, -οὔ, ὁ and ἡ, voc. θεέ, once in the N. T., Mt. xxvii. 46; besides in Deut. iii. 24; Judg. [xvi. 28;] xxi. 3; [2 S. vii. 25; Is. xxxviii. 20]; Sir. xxiii. 4; Sap. ix. 1; 3 Mace. vi. 3; 4 Mace. vi. 27; Act. Thom. 44 sq. 57; Eus. h. 6. 2, 23,16; [5, 20,7; vit. Const. 2,55, 1.59]; ef. W. §8, 2 ο.; [B. 12 (11)]; ({on the eight or more proposed derivations see Vaniéek p. 386, who follows Curtius (after Doderlein) p. 513 sqq. in connecting it with a root meaning to supplicate, implore; hence the implored ; per contra cf. Max Miiller, Chips ete. iv. 227 sq.; L. and 8. s. v. fin.]); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 58, ΟΝ and m7; a god, a goddess; 1. a general appellation of deities or divinities: Acts xxviii. 6; 1 Co. viii. 4; 2 Th. ii. 4; once ἡ θεός, Acts xix. 37 G LT Tr WH; θεοῦ φωνὴ καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώπου, Acts xii. 22; ἄνθρωπος ὧν ποιεῖς σεαυτὸν θεόν, Jn. x. 33; plur., of the gods of the…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

θεός. For the application of the title θεός to the Ptolemaic kings it is sufficient to recall Brit. Mus. Inscrr. IV. 1 No. 906% (B.C. 284-273) where a votive offering is dedicated in honour of Πτολεμαίου τοῦ σωτῆρος καὶ θεοῦ, and the description of Ptolemy V. (Epiphanes) on the Rosetta stone—OG/S gol? (B.C. 196) ὑπάρχων θεὸς ἐκ θεοῦ Kal θεᾶς : cf. Deissmann LAE, p. 348 and the full discussion by E. Kornemann ‘‘ Zur Geschichte der antiken Herrscherkulte” in Beztrdge zur alten Geschichte [Klio] i., p. 51 ff. (Leipzig, 1902). The same practice is still more strikingly illustrated in the Imperial period, as when in an inscr. from the Fayum district, dated March 17th, B.c. 24, Augustus is described as θεὸς ἐκ θεοῦ (OG/S 6557), or as when a votive inscr. is addressed to Nero—daya0a(t) θεῶ(ι) (Cos 927): see Deissmann 7s. p. 349. With this may be compared the frequent use for Augustus of the…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

θεός (theos) — God.

θεός, ὁ,

Boeotian dialect θιός, Laconian dialect σιός (see. below), [Refs 5th c.AD+], Cretan dialect θιός [Refs], Doric dialect also θεύς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; vocative (only late) θεός, also θεέ [LXX+NT]; but classical in compound names, Ἀμφίθεε, Τιμόθεε:—God, the Deity, in general sense, both singular and plural (εἰ καὶ ἐπὶ θεοὺς καὶ ἔτι μᾶλλον ἐπὶ θεὸν ἁρμόζει μεταφέρειν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; σὺν θ. εἰρημένον [Refs 5th c.BC+]: so in plural, σύν γε θεοῖσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐ θεῶν ἄτερ pi.[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑπὲρ θεόν against his will,[Refs 4th c.BC+]; θεῶν συνεθελόντων, βουλομένων, [Refs 5th c.BC+]bless you! good heavens! for heaven's sake! [Refs 8th c.BC+]: doubled in poets, θεὸν θεόν τις ἀγλαϊζέτω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θεοί (Cretan dialect θιοί) as an opening formula in Inscrr. (i.e. τύχην ἀγαθὴν διδοῖεν), [Refs].1, etc.: in Prose also with the Article, ὁ θ.…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

θεός

theos

of uncertain affinity; a deity, especially (with 3588) the supreme

Divinity; figuratively, a magistrate; by Hebraism, very:--X exceeding,

God, god(-ly, -ward).

see GREEK for 3588

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

θεός, οῦ, ὁ

n.f. & n.m.

God, a god

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

θεός theos 1x

a deity, Acts 7:43; 1 Cor. 8:5; an idol, Acts 7:40; God, the true God, Mt. 3:9, et al. freq.; God, possessed of true godhead, Jn. 1:1; Rom. 9:5; from the Hebrew, applied to potentates, Jn. 10:34, 35; τῷ θεῷ, an intensive term, from the Hebrew, exceedingly, Acts 7:20, and, perhaps, 2 Cor. 10:4

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

θεός θεός, ὁ, God, Hom., both in general sense, Θεὸς δώσει God will grant, and in particular sense, θεός τις a god; πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Hom.:—things are said to happen σὺν θεῷ, σύν γε θεοῖσιν by the will of God, id. Hom., etc.; οὐκ ἄνευ θεοῦ, Lat. non sine diis, Od.; οὐκ ἄνευθε θεοῦ Il.; οὐ θεῶν ἄτερ Pind.;— ἐκ θεόφι Il.;— ὑπὲρ θεόν against his will, id. Il.;— κατὰ θεόν τινα, Lat. divinitus, Eur.:—as an oath, πρὸς θεῶν by the gods, in God's name, Trag.; θεὸς ἴστω Soph., etc.

θεός as fem. for θεά, θέαινα, a goddess, Hom.; θήλεια θεός Il.; ἡ νερτέρα θ. Proserpine, Soph.; often in oaths, νὴ τὼ θεώ id. Soph.; ναὶ τὼ σιώ, with the Spartans, of Castor and Pollux, Xen.; with the Boeotians, of Amphion and Zethus, id.…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

god ('Elohim, 'El, [`Elyon], Shadday, Yahweh; Theos):

I. INTRODUCTION TO THE GENERAL IDEA

1. The Idea in Experience and in Thought

2. Definition of the Idea

3. The Knowledge of God

4. Ethnic Ideas of God

(1) Animism

(2) Fetishism

(3) Idolatry

(4) Polytheism

(5) Henotheism

(6) Pantheism

(7) Deism

(8) Semitic Monolatry

(9) Monotheism

II. THE IDEA OF GOD IN THE OLD TESTAMENT

1. The Course of Its Development

2. Forms of Its Manifestation

(1) The Face or Countenance of God

(2) The Voice and Word of God

(3) The Glory of God

(4) The Angel of God

(5) The Spirit of God

(6) The Name of God

(7) Occasional Forms

3. The Names of God

(1) Generic

(2) Attributive

(3) Yahweh

4. Pre-prophetic Conceptions of God

(1) Yahweh Alone Is the God of Israel

(a) His Early Worship

(b) Popular Religion

(c) Polytheistic Tendencies

(i) Coordination

(ii) Assimilation

(iii) Disintegration

(d) No Hebrew Goddesses

(e) Human Sacrifices

Easton's Bible Dictionary

God

(A.S. and Dutch God; Dan. Gud; Ger. Gott), the name of the Divine Being. It is the rendering (1) of the Hebrew ’El, from a word meaning to be strong; (2) of ’Eloah_, plural _’Elohim. The singular form, Eloah, is used only in poetry. The plural form is more commonly used in all parts of the Bible, The Hebrew word Jehovah (q.v.), the only other word generally employed to denote the Supreme Being, is uniformly rendered in the Authorized Version by “LORD,” printed in small capitals. The existence of God is taken for granted in the Bible. There is nowhere any argument to prove it. He who disbelieves this truth is spoken of as one devoid of understanding (Ps. 14:1).

The arguments generally adduced by theologians in proof of the being of God are:

(1.) The a priori argument, which is the testimony afforded by reason.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(good). Throughout the Hebrew Scriptures two chief names are used for the one true divine Being--ELOHIM, commonly translated God in our version, and JEHOVAH, translated Lord . Elohim is the plural of Eloah (in Arabic Allah); it is often used in the short form EL (a word signifying strength , as in EL-SHADDAI, God Almighty, the name by which God was specially known to the patriarchs. (Genesis 17:1; 28:3; Exodus 6:3) The etymology is uncertain, but it is generally agreed that the primary idea is that of strength, power of effect , and that it properly describes God in that character in which he is exhibited to all men in his works, as the creator, sustainer and supreme governor of the world. The plural form of Elohim has given rise to much discussion. The fanciful idea that it…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

This name, the derivation of which is uncertain, we give to that eternal, infinite, perfect, and incomprehensible Being, the Creator of all things, who preserves and governs all by his almighty power and wisdom, and is the only proper object of worship. The proper Hebrew name for God is JEHOVAH, which signifies He is. But the Jews, from a feeling of reverence, avoid pronouncing this name, substituting for it, wherever it occurs in the sacred test, the word ADONAI, Lord; except in the expression, ADONAI JEHOVAH, Lord Jehovah, for which they put, ADONAI ELOHIM, Lord God. This usage, which is not without an element of superstition, is very ancient, dating its origin some centuries before Christ; but there is no good ground for assuming its existence in the days of the inspired Old Testament writers. The proper word for God is ELOHIM, which is plural in its form, being thus used to signify…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
96%god
god96% · 1289×other renderings3% · 34×other renderings1% · 19×

1,342 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 14 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject31%adverbial26%object24%predicate12%indirect object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,311 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
βασιλείαkingship, sovereλόγοςa word, speech, υἱόςa son, descenden
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theπαράδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnes
ἀπό
εἰρήνηpeace, peace of ὅτιthat, since, becἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
ἈβραάμPropἸσαάκPropΧριστόςanointed, the Me
εἰμίI am, exist
οὐNegυἱόςa son, descendenοὗτος
θεόςGod1311×
what comes after →
Article the
δίδωμιI offer, giveπαντοκράτωρruler of the uniπατήρfather, Father,
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theπατήρfather, Father, αὐτός
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,Article theἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, p
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςΧριστόςanointed, the Me
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,εἰς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceθεός · 1,311× in the New Testament
Acts Romans Luke 1 Corinthians Revelation John 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 John Matthew Mark 1 Peter

15 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 1,637 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 7c. AD 40

Τινὲς γὰρ τὸν κόσμον μᾶλλον ἢ τὸν κοσμοποιὸν θαυμάσαντες τὸν μὲν ἀγένητόν τε καὶ ἀίδιον ἀπεφήναντο, τοῦ δὲ θεοῦ πολλὴν ἀπραξίαν ἀνάγνως κατεψεύσαντο, δέον ἔμπαλιν τοῦ μὲν τὰς δυνάμεις ὡς ποιητοῦ καὶ πατρὸς καταπλαγῆναι, τὸν δὲ μὴ πλέον ἀποσεμνῦναι…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς πύργος, ὃν οἱ παῖδες αὐτοῦ ἐφ' ὕβρει τοῦ θεοῦ ᾠκοδόμησαν, καὶ ὡς τὰς φωνὰς αὐτῶν μετέβαλε καὶ ὁ τόπος, ἐν ᾧ τοῦτο γέγονε, Βαβυλὼν ἐκλήθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 7th c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

αὐτῷ μέρος ἧς ἐμισθώσατο σὺν Πακοίβι Σχώτου καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς

P.Adl. 20Poinkoris (Diopolites)99 BC

1 βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ καὶ Ἀλεξάνδρου θεοῦ Φιλομήτορος καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεᾶς Φιλαδέλφου ἔτους ἑκκαιδεκάτου ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ

Chrest.Wilck. 12Pathyris89 BC

ἡμῖν Φιλόξενος ὁ ἀδελφὸς διʼ ὧν κεκόμικεν ἡμῖν Ὄρσης γραμμάτων περὶ τοῦ τὸν μέγιστον Θεὸν Σωτῆρα βασιλέα ἐπιβεβληκέναι εἰς Μέμφιν, Ἱέρακα δὲ προκεχειρίσθαι μετὰ δυνάμεων μυρίων ἐπὶ καταστολὴν τῆς

What if now desiring <the> God to show the wrath and to make known the power of Him bore with much patience [the] vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,
ἐνδείξασθαιendeiknumi to show G1731 Verb · aorist · middle · infinitive
11× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To show or indicate something, as in Romans 2:15 and 9:22. It means to point out or prove a fact or situation. This word is about making something clear or visible.
Tyndale gloss
to show
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐνδείκνυμι (i.e., *endeiknumi*) combines the prefix ἐν (in) with the root δείκνυμι (to show). It generally means to indicate or demonstrate something, either by words or actions. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts like Romans 2:15 and Hebrews 6:10, where it conveys the idea of proving or manifesting. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν-δείκνυμι

[in LXX for לָכַד, גָּמַל, רָאָה hi. ;]

to mark, point out. Mid„

to show forth, prove: c. acc rei, Ro 2:15 9:22, Eph 2:7, Tit 2:10 3:2, He 6:11; seq. ἐν, c. dat. pers., Ro 9:17 (LXX), I Ti 1:16; seq. εἰς, He 6:10 (c. cogn. acc), II Co 8:24.

to manifest (by act): c. acc rei et dat. pers., II Ti 4:14 (cf. Ge 50:15

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν-δείκνυμι : fo point out, (Lat. indicare; Germ. anzeigen), fr. Pind. down; in mid. first in Hom.; in the N. T. only in Mid. : [pres. évdeixvupac]; 1 aor. ἐνεδειξάμην ; prop. to show one’s self in something, show something in one’s self (ef. B. 192 (166) ]; 1. to show, demonstrate, prove, whether by arguments or by acts: ri, Ro. ix. 22 (joined with γνωρίσαι) ; Eph. ii. 7; Tit. ii. 10; iii. 2; Heb. vi. 11; with two acc., the one of the object, the other of the predicate, Ro. ii. 15; ri ἔν τινι, dat. of the pers., Ro. ix. 17 (fr. Ex. ix. 16 [ef. W. 254 (238)]); 1 Tim.i. 16; ri εἰς τὸ ὄνομά Twos, Heb. vi. 10; τὴν ἔνδειξιν ἐνδείκνυσθαι (as in Plat. legg. 12 p. 966 b.; cf. W. 295 (211)); εἴς τινα, 2 Co. viii. 24. 2. to manifest, display, put forth: τινὶ (dat. of pers.) κακά, 2 Tim. iv. 14; Gen. ]. 15…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐνδείκνυμι. P Magd 3109 (B.c. 221) ἐὰν ἐνδειξώμεθα τὰ διὰ τῆς ἐντεύξεως ὄντα ἀληθῆ, ““1Γ we prove that what we set forth in the petition is true,” 24. 288 (B.c. 217) ἐὰν ἐνδείξωμαι αὐτοὺς κατακεκλυκότας μου τὸν σπόρον, ‘if I prove that they have flooded my sown field.’’ With the construction of ἐ. in 2 Tim 44 πολλά μοι kaka ἐνεδείξατο (cf. Gen 5015; 17) cf. P Oxy III. 4945 (a.p. 156) εὐνοούσῃ μοι kal πᾶσαν πίστιν μοι ἐνδεικνυμένῃ (a passage which also helps to confirm the meaning of ‘‘ faithfulness” for πίστις in such passages as Mt 2375, Gal 52): see also Sy/7 2117 (11.8.6. Ὁ) διατε[λ]εῖ εἰς τὸν δῆμον τὸν “HpvOpalwy [π]ᾶσαν προθυμίαν ἐνδεικνύμενο[ς (cf. Heb 611), and P Oxy IV. 705°? (A.D. 2οο-2). For the act., which is not found in the NT, see P Grenf IT. 708 (A.D. 269) εὐνοίας ἕνεκεν [κ]αὶ ἧς ἐνέ[δειξας eis ἐμ[έ. The subst. ἐνδείκτης = ‘‘ informer,’’ ‘‘ complainant,’’ occurs P Par 45%…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐνδείκνυμι (endeiknumi) — to show.

ἐνδείκ-νῡμι

or ἐνδεικνύω, future -δείξω, mark, point out, τι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; indicate, τοὺς καιρούς [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: with participle, show that a thing is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. law-term, inform against, τινά [Refs 5th c.BC+]:— middle, [Refs 1st c.AD+]:—frequently in passive, κακοῦργος ἐνδεδειγμένος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐνδειχθέντα δικάζειν ὀφείλοντα τῷ δημοσίῳ [Refs 4th c.BC+]

3. exhibit, display, ὑπερήφανον αἰχμάν [Refs 4th c.BC+]

4. middle, declare the possession of goods to fiscal authorities, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]

II. middle, show forth oneself or what is one's own, once in [Refs 8th c.BC+] I will declare myself to Achilles, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐνδείκνυμι

endeiknumi

from 1722 and 1166; to indicate (by word or act):--do, show (forth).

see GREEK for 1722

see GREEK for 1166

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐνδείκνυμι

v.

I show forth

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐνδείκνυμι endeiknymi 11x

to manifest, display, Rom. 9:17, 22; Heb. 6:10; to give outward proof of, Rom. 2:15; to display a certain bearing towards a person; hence, to perpetrate openly, 2 Tim. 4:14*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐνδείκνυμι or -ύω fut. -δείξω, to mark, point out, Lat. indicare, Soph., etc.

as attic law-term, to inform against one, Plat.; so in Mid., Plut.:—in Pass., ἐνδεδειγμένος Plat.; ἐνδειχθέντα δεκάζειν being informed against for bribing, Dem.

Mid. to shew forth oneself or what is one's own, Πηλείδῃ ἐνδείξομαι I will declare myself to Achilles, Il.; ἐνδείκνυσθαι τὴν γνώμην Hdt.

with a part. to shew, give proof of doing, Eur., etc.

c. acc. rei, to display, exhibit, Lat. prae se ferre, Aesch., Thuc.

ἐνδείκνυσθαί τινι to display oneself to one, make a set at him, court him, Dem., Aeschin.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AMN — Verb · aorist · middle · infinitive
aorist middle infinitive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AMN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Middle Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5670

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

sho.

See SHEW.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
27%show
show27% · 3×showing27% · 3×i may show9% · 1×he may show9% · 1×may display9% · 1×did9% · 1×you have shown9% · 1×

11 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 11 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
εἰςArticle the
ὅστις
ὅπωςhow, in order that,
σύ
θεόςGod, a god
Article the
ἵναin order that, so th
ἐνδείκνυμιto show11×
what comes after →
Article the
ἔργονwork, labor, actὀργήanger, wrath, pa
ἐν
σύArticle the
εἰς
πρόσωπονthe face, counteArticle the
ἸησοῦςJesus
Χριστόςanointed, the Me
ἀποδίδωμιI give back, return,
αὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐνδείκνυμι · 11× in the New Testament
Romans Hebrews Titus 1 Timothy 2 Corinthians 2 Timothy Ephesians
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.34c. AD 40

ἐᾷ μὲν γὰρ τὸν ὀλοθρεύοντα — ὄλεθρος δὲ ψυχῆς ἐστιν ἡ τροπή — εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ψυχήν, ἵνα τὸ ἴδιον ἐνδείξηται τοῦ γενητοῦ·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 8.300c. AD 75–95

ὅτι βασιλεὺς ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ γενόμενος οὐκ ἠμείψατο τὴν εὐεργεσίαν τῷ δικαίως προστῆναι τοῦ πλήθους καὶ εὐσεβῶς, ἅπερ αὐτοῖς πρῶτον τοῖς οὖσι τοιούτοις ἀγαθὰ ἔπειτα τῷ θεῷ φίλα, τὸν δὲ κάκιστον Ἱεροβόαμον ἐμιμήσατο καὶ τῆς ψυχῆς ἀπολομένης τῆς ἐκείνου…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Cair. Zen. 4 59620Arsinoites (?)249 BC–240 BC

δέομαι οὖν σου, βασιλεῦ, ἐπειδὴ ὁ μὲν φθαρεὶς ὑπὸ τῆς Ἀρσινόης ἀνακεχώρηκεν ἵνα μὴ ἐνδείξηται ὡς ἔστιν αὑτοῦ ἡ οἰκία … … … ένη ἀνακαλέσηται

SB 6 9156ArsinoitesAD 300

ἠθέλησεν καὶ διʼ ἡμῶν ἀξιωθῆναι, ὡς διὰ γραμμάτων τὴν προαίρεσίν σου … ον ἐνδιαθέτως ἐνδείξασθαι σπουδάσῃς. διὰ ταῦτα γράφομεν πρὸς τὴν σὴν καλοκαγαθίαν, ἵνα σπουδάσῃς τῷ ἀνδρί. ἔφη γὰρ

οὖν νῦν δεηθεὶς θελήσεις καὶ αὐτὸς τὴν αὐτὴν ἴσην εὔνοιαν καὶ τιμὴν πρὸς ἐμὲ ἐνδείξασθαι. ε … κατὰ τὸν ἴδιον τοῦ Παύλου οἶνον ἐφʼ ἑ

What if now desiring <the> God to show the wrath and to make known the power of Him bore with much patience [the] vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,
τὴνho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASF — Article · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

What if now desiring <the> God to show the wrath and to make known the power of Him bore with much patience [the] vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,
ὀργὴνorgē wrath G3709 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
36× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
In the Bible, this word means God's strong anger or wrath towards sin, as seen in Romans 1:18 and Revelation 14:10. It's a desire for justice and a reaction against wrongdoing. This concept is also applied to human anger, like in Ephesians 4:31.
Amplified meaning
strong anger, opposition to sin
Tyndale gloss
wrath
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὀργή (orgē) means anger, wrath, or passion. It is derived from a root meaning to swell or teem, indicating an internal agitation. In the New Testament, it describes both human anger and the divine reaction against sin, appearing in verses like Mark 3:5 and Romans 1:18. Lexicons note that it differs from θυμός (thymos), which refers to a more transient emotional state.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — θυμός, ὀργή, παροργισμός from a scan

Θυμός and ὀργή are found several times together in the N. T. (as at Rom. ii. 8; Ephes. iv. 31; Col. iii. 8; Rev. xix. 15); often also in the Septuagint (Ps. lxxvii. 49; Dan. iii. 13; Mic. v. 15), and often also in other Greek (Plato, Philebus, 47 6; Polybius, vi. 56. 11; Josephus, Antt. xx. 5. 3; Plutarch, De Coh. Ird, 2; Lucian, De Cal. 23); nor are they found only in the connexion of juxtaposition, but one made dependent on the other; thus θυμὸς τῆς ὀργῆς (Rev. xvi. 19; ef. Job iii. 17; Josh. vii. 26); while ὀργὴ θυμοῦ, not occurring in the N. T., is frequent in the Old (2 Chron. xxix. 10; Lam. i. 12; Isai. xxx. 27; Hos. xi.9). On one occasion in the Septuagint all the words of this group occur together (Jer. xxi. 5). When these words, after a considerable anterior history, came to settle down on the passion of anger, as the strongest of all passions, impulses, and desires (see…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὀργή, -ῆς, ἡ,

[in LXX chiefly for אַף, also for חָרוֹן, חֵמָה, קֶצֶף, etc.;]

impulse, propensity, disposition.

anger, wrath;

of men: Mk 3:5, Eph 4:31, Col 3:8, I Ti 2:8, Ja 1:19, 20;

of God;

that reaction of the divine nature against sin which in anthropomorphic language is called anger: Ro 1:18 9:22 12:19, (ICC, in l.), I Th 1:10 2:16, He 3:11 4:3(LXX), Re 14:10 16:19 19:15;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὀργή, -ῆς, 7, (fr. ὀργάω to teem, denoting an internal motion, esp. that of plants and fruits swelling with juice [Curtius § 152]; ef. Lat. turgere alicui for irasci alicui in Plaut. Cas. 2, 5,17; Most. 8, 2,10; οἵ. Germ. arg, Aerger), in Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod down the natural disposition, temper, character; movement or agitation of soul, impulse, desire, any violent emotion, but esp. (and chiefly in Attic) anger. In bibl. Grk. anger, wrath, indignation, (on the distinction between it and θυμός, see θυμός, 1): Eph. iv. 31; Col. iii. 8; Jas.i.19sq.; μετ᾽ ὀργῆς, indignant, [A. V. with anger], Mk. iii. 5; χωρὶς ὀργῆς, 1 Tim. ii. 8; anger exhibited in punishing, hence used for the punishment itself (Dem. or. in Mid. § 43): of the punishments inflicted by magistrates, Ro. xiii.4; διὰ τὴν ὀργήν, i. 6. because disobedience is visited with punishment, ib. 5. The ὀργή attributed to God in the N.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὀργή ‘“suddenly I open my eyes and see the twins in the school of Tothes,”’ 26. 441} (B.C. 153) ἐγὼ yap ἐνύπνια ὁρῶ πονηρά, followed by βλέπω Μενέδημον κατατρέχοντά pe, and 20. 45° (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski*, p. 85) ὁρῶ ἐν τῴ ὕπνῳ τὸν δραπέδην Μενέδημον ἀντικείμενον ἡμῖν. See also P Leid Wii. 26 (ji/ili A.D.) oé, τὸν αὐτογέννητον θεόν, τὸν πάντα (= δρῶντα καὶ πάντα ἀκούοντα, καὶ μὴ ὁρώμενον, and the iv/A.D. Christian sepulchral inser., P Hamb I. 225 Y]iz θεοῦ μεγάλοιο τὸν οὐδέποτ᾽ ἔδρακεν ἀνήρ: cf. Jn 115, I Tim 615: The meaning ‘‘see” with the mind, ‘‘perceive,’’ ‘‘ discern,” may be traced in such exx. as P Hib I. 444 (B.c. 253) ὁρῶντες δέ σε καταραθυμοῦντα Suny ϑεῖν kal νῦν ἐπιστεῖλαί σοι, ““Ῥαΐ seeing that you are negligent I thought it my duty to send to you instructions again now’ (Edd.), BGU IV. 1078" (A.D. 39) λοιπὸν οὖν, ἐὰν λάβω τὰ κερμάμια (/. κεράμια or κερμάτια), ὄψομαι, τί με…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὀργή (orgē) — wrath.

ὀργή, ἡ,

natural impulse or propensity (see. ὀργάω II): hence, temperament, disposition, mood, κηφήνεσσι κοθούροις εἴκελος ὀργήν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; so μείλιχος, γλυκεῖα ὀργά, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὠμή, ἀτέραμνος ὀργή, [Refs]; ὀργῆς νοσούσης εἰσὶν ἰατροὶ λόγοι of 'a mind diseased', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀστυνόμοι ὀργαί social dispositions, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also in Prose, διεπειρᾶτο αὐτῶν τῆς τε ἀνδραγαθίης καὶ τῆς ὀργῆς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐπιφέρειν ὀργάς τινι suit one's moods to another, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. anger, wrath, ὀργῇ χρῆσθαι to be in a passion, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὀργῇ εἶξαι, χαρίζεσθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+] involves anger, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὀργή

orge

from 3713; properly, desire (as a reaching forth or excitement of the

mind), i.e. (by analogy), violent passion (ire, or (justifiable)

abhorrence); by implication punishment:--anger, indignation,

vengeance, wrath.

see GREEK for 3713

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὀργή, ῆς, ἡ

n.f.

anger, wrath, passion

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὀργή orgē 36x

pr. mental bent, impulse; anger, indignation, wrath, Eph. 4:31; Col. 3:8; μετ’ ὀργῆς, indignantly, Mk. 3:5; vengeance, punishment, Mt. 3:7; Lk. 3:7; 21:23; Rom. 13:4, 5

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὀργή ὀργη, ἡ,

natural impulse or propension: one's temper, temperament, disposition, nature, Hes., Theogn., etc.; ἀλωπέκων ὀργαῖς ἴκελοι Pind.; ὀργαὶ ἀστυνόμοι social dispositions, Soph.; πρὸς τὰ παρόντα τὰς ὀργὰς ὁμοιοῦν Thuc., etc.

passion, anger, wrath, Hdt., Soph., etc.; ὀργῇ χάριν δοῦναι Soph.; ὀργῇ εἴκειν Eur.; δι᾽ ὀργῆς ἔχειν τινά Thuc.; ἐν ὀργῇ ἔχειν or ποιεῖσθαί τινα id. Thuc., etc.

Adverbial usages, ὀργῇ, in anger, Hdt., etc.; so, δι᾽ ὀργῆς, ἐξ ὀργῆς, κατ᾽ ὀργήν Soph.; μετ᾽ ὀργῆς Plat.

Πανὸς ὀργαί panic fears (i. e. terrors sent by Pan), Eur.:—but, ὀργή τινος anger against a person or at a thing, Soph.; ἱερῶν ὀργάς wrath at or because of the rites…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

→ (Anger, judgment, punishment)

→ See ANGER

→ See GOD, ANGER OF

→ See JUDGMENT

→ See PUNISHMENT, DIVINE

→ See PUNISHMENT, ETERNAL

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
72%wrath
wrath72% · 26×anger17% · 6×wrath?8% · 3×wrath!3% · 1×

36 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial42%subject31%object22%indirect object3%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 36 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἔρχομαιI come, goἀπόἐν
εἰς
ἔκδικοςavenging, an aveθεόςGod, a godβραδύςslow
μέλλωI am about to
Article the
καίand, even, also, nam
γῆthe earth, soil,θυμόςan outburst of p
μετά
αὐτός
ὀργήwrath36×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godλαόςa people, the crArticle the
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀποκάλυψιςan unveiling, unθυμόςan outburst of pγνωρίζωI make known, de
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,
ἀλλάbut, except
καίand, even, also,εἰς
ἐγώ
εἰCond

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὀργή · 36× in the New Testament
Romans Revelation 1 Thessalonians Ephesians Colossians Hebrews James Luke 1 Timothy John Matthew Mark
Across the New Testament12 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 154 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 156c. AD 40

ἐφ’ ᾧ τὸν πατέρα χαλεπήναντα — ἡ γὰρ πρᾶξις ὀργῆς ἀξία, ἐπεὶ παρελθόντες τὸ ζωῆς ἀθανάτου φυτόν, τὴν ἀρετῆς παντέλειαν, ὑφ’ ἧς μακραίωνα καὶ εὐδαίμονα βίον ἐδύναντο καρποῦσθαι, τὸν ἐφήμερον καὶ θνητὸν οὐ βίον ἀλλὰ χρόνον κακοδαιμονίας μεστὸν εἵλοντο…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.58c. AD 75–95

τῆς μὲν οὖν ἐπὶ τῷ φόνῳ τιμωρίας αὐτὸν ἠφίει θυσίαν ἐπιτελέσαντα καὶ διʼ αὐτῆς ἱκετεύσαντα μὴ λαβεῖν ὀργὴν αὐτῷ χαλεπωτέραν, ἐπάρατον δʼ αὐτὸν ἐτίθει καὶ τοὺς ἐγγόνους αὐτοῦ τιμωρήσεσθαι κατὰ τὴν ἑβδόμην ἠπείλησε γενεάν, καὶ τῆς γῆς αὐτὸν ἐκείνης…

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 39.7c. AD 96

ἐπικάλεσαι δέ, εἴ τίς σοι ὑπακούσεται, ἤ εἴ τινα ἁγίων ἀγγέλων ὄψῃ: καὶ γὰρ ἄφρονα ἀναιρεῖ ὀργή.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. AD 5th c. AD
O.Did. 403DidymoiAD 110–AD 115

οὐκ ἐδυνάμην γὰρ ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης ἡμέρας ἀποστείλῃ τὸ δικότυλον ἐλαίου ἀλλὰ ὀργή με ἔλαβε ὅτι ἔπεμψας Μάξιμον καὶ … … εκπρασταμυ

P.Mich. 14 679AD 126–AD 175

εἰ μὴ μόνον περὶ τοῦ ὄνου Καρᾶτος. ὑμεῖς δὲ ἐφάνητέ με καιροτηροῦσαι καὶ εἰ ὀργή τις ἔνι ἐν τῷ με μηδὲν παραπέμψασθαι ἀκούσαντα, ἰδοὺ ἐπλήγην ὑπὸ ἵππου καὶ ἐκινδύνευσα

σὺν Ἀντωνίῳ τῷ προγεγραμμένῳ ἀδελφῷ … … τούτου καὶ τῆς περὶ αὐτὸν ἀμέτρου ὀργῆς … … σας· εἰς δὲ ἀπόδειξιν ὅτι κακοῦ βίου ε … … … -ηγήσαντος

What if now desiring <the> God to show the wrath and to make known the power of Him bore with much patience [the] vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Romans than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

What if now desiring <the> God to show the wrath and to make known the power of Him bore with much patience [the] vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,
γνωρίσαιgnōrizō to make known G1107 Verb · aorist · active · infinitive
26× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To make known or inform someone is what this verb means, like when Jesus told his disciples in John 15:15. It's used to reveal or declare something, as in Romans 9:22-23.
Tyndale gloss
to make known
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

γνωρίζω (gnorizo) means to make known or to know, derived from the verb γιγνώσκω (gignosko). It covers the act of revealing information or becoming acquainted with someone or something. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as John 15:15 and Philippians 1:22. The entries do not indicate any significant disagreement among lexicons.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

γνωρίζω

(< γιγνώσκω),

[in LXX chiefly for ידע hi. ;]

as most commonly in cl., to come to know, discover, know: Phl 1:22 (but cf. R, mg.).

to make known: c. acc., Ro 9:22, 23; c. acc. rei da.t. pers., Lk 2:15, Jo 15:15 17:26, Ac 2:28 (LXX), I Co 15:1, II Co 8:1, Ga 1:11, Eph 1:9 6:19, 21 Col 4:7, 9 II Pe 1:16; c. dat., seq. ὅτι, I Co 12:3; seq.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

γνωρίζω ; fut. γνωρίσω (Jn. xvii. 26; Eph. vi. 21; Col. iv. 7), Attic 16 (Col. iv. 9 [L WH -ίσω; B. 37 (32); WH. App. p. 163]); 1 aor. ἐγνώρισα; Pass., [pres. γνωρίCoat]; 1 aor. ἐγνωρίσθην; in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down [see ad fin.]; Sept. for yin and Chald. pryn; 1. trans. to make known: ri, Ro. ix. 22 sq.; τί τινι, Lk. ii. 15; Jn. xv. 15; xvii. 26; Acts ii. 28; 2 Co. viii. 1; Eph. iii. 5, 10, [pass. in these two exx.]; Eph. vi. 21; Col. iv. 7,9; 2 Pet. 1. 16; τινὶ τὸ μυστήριον, Eph. i. 9; iii. 3 [G LT Tr WH read the pass.]; vi. 19; τινὶ ὅτι, 1 Co. xii. 3; τινί τι, ὅτι 1. GQ. τινὶ ὅτι τι, Gal. i. 11; foll. by τί interrog. Col. i. 27; περί τινος, Lk. ii. 17 LT Tr WH; γνωριζέσθω πρὸς τὸν θεόν be brought to the knowledge of God, Phil. iv. 6 ; γνωρίζεσθαι εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη to be made known unto all the nations, Ro. xvi. 26; contextually and emphatically i. q. to recall to one’s mind, as…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

γνωρίζω. P Oxy VIT. 102478 (A.D. 129) ὃν καὶ γνωριεῖς ἰδίῳ κινδύνῳ, ““whom you are to recognize at your own risk” (Ed.). P Hib 1. 28° (c. B.c. 265) twa]. . . κ[αὶ] γνωρίζηται ὑπὸ τῶν φρατόρων “(that he may) . . . be recognized by the members of the phratries” (Edd.). On P Oxy III. 4966 (A.D. 127), where the noun γνωστήρ occurs, the editors quote BGU II. 581" (a.p. 133), where L. Octavius Longus γνωρίζει a person. ‘‘ The γνωστήρ of a person was a witness of his or her identity.” So P Oxy VI. 976 (a.p. 197) Tlavicivos . . γνωρίζω. The verb is found joined with θαυμάζω in a letter from the Emperor Claudius to a Gymnastic Club in a.p. 47, embodied in P Lond 117827 (a.p. 194) (=III. p. 216) τὴν πρὸς ἐμαυτὸν μὲν εὔνοιαν περὶ δὲ ὑμᾶς φιλανθρωπίαν ἐγνώρισα μᾶλλον ἢ ἐθαύμασα, and in another London papyrus it has definitely the meaning ‘‘make known,” as in all its NT occurrences (even Phil 153)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

γνωρίζω (gnōrizō) — to make known.

γνωρ-ίζω,

future Attic dialect-ῐῶ: perfect ἐγνώρικα [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—make known, point out, [NT+4th c.BC+]:—in this sense mostly passive, become known, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. with accusative person, make known, τινά τινι [Refs 1st c.AD+]; commend, τινὰ τῇ βουλῇ ἰσχυρῶς [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

3. certify a person's identity, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. gain knowledge of, become acquainted with, discover, with participle, τοὔργον ὡς οὐ γνωριοῖμί σου τόδε δόλῳ προσέρπον [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; γ. περί τι or περί τινος [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II.2. become acquainted with, τινά [Refs 5th c.BC+] — passive, ἐγνωρισμένοι αὐτῷ being made acquainted with him, [Refs]; πρός τινος [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

γνωρίζω

gnorizo

from a derivative of 1097; to make known; subjectively, to

know:--certify, declare, make known, give to understand, do to wit,

wot.

see GREEK for 1097

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

γνωρίζω

v.

I make known, declare, know

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

γνωρίζω gnōrizō 25x

to make known, reveal, declare, Jn. 15:15; 17:26, et al.; to know, Phil. 1:22

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

γνωρίζω γιγνώσκω to make known, point out, explain, Aesch.:—Pass. to become known, Plat.

c. acc. pers. to make known, τινά τινι Plut.

to gain knowledge of, discover that a thing is, c. part., Soph., Thuc.

to be acquainted with, make acquaintance with, τινά Plat., Dem.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAN — Verb · aorist · active · infinitive
aorist active infinitive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5658

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
13%make known
make known13% · 3×i make known13% · 3×will make known13% · 3×you have made known4% · 1×he may make known4% · 1×we make known4% · 1×having made known4% · 1×he made known4% · 1×other renderings42% · 10×

24 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 18 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 26 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
σύὀργήanger, wrath, pa
ἵναin order that, so th
καίand, even, also,
οὐNeg
γενεάa generationαἱρέωI choose, prefer
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
πράσσωI do, fare, requἐγώ
σύ
αἴτημαa petition, requπᾶςall, the whole,
γνωρίζωto make known26×
what comes after →
σύ
ΤυχικόςTychicusὅτιthat, since, becArticle the
Article the
δυνατόςpowerful, able, πλοῦτοςriches, wealthυἱόςa son, descenden
ἐγώ
Article theὁδόςa way, road, jou
δέbut, on the other ha
σύ
περί
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceγνωρίζω · 26× in the New Testament
Ephesians Colossians John Romans 1 Corinthians Acts Luke Philippians 2 Corinthians 2 Peter Galatians
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 21 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Didache The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 53c. AD 40

χρεῖος δὲ ὁ μὲν νοῦς ἐπιστήμης εἰς τὸ γνωρίσαι τὰ ἀσώματα, ὀφθαλμὸς δὲ φωτὸς εἰς τὴν τῶν σωμάτων ἀντίληψιν, ὃ πολλῶν μὲν καὶ ἄλλων ἀγαθῶν αἴτιον γέγονεν ἀνθρώποις, διαφερόντως δὲ τοῦ μεγίστου, φιλοσοφίας·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.36c. AD 75–95

καὶ ὁ Ἄδαμος προσαχθεῖσαν αὐτὴν ἐγνώρισεν ἐξ αὑτοῦ γενομένην.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.7c. AD 100

ἐγνώρισεν γὰρ ἡμῖν ὁ δεσπότης διὰ τῶν προφητῶν τὰ παρεληλυθότα καὶ τὰ ἐνεστῶτα, καὶ τῶν μελλόντων δοὺς ἀπαρχὰς ἡμῖν γεύσεως, ὧν τὰ καθ̓ ἕκαστα βλέποντες ἐνεργούμενα, καθὼς ἐλάλησεν, ὀφείλομεν πλουσιώτερον καὶ ὑψηλότερον προσάγειν τῷ φόβῳ αὐτοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 5th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 2 49Ptolemais Euergetis (ArsinoitesAD 141

μου ἀπογραψαμένης ἐπʼ ἀμφόδου Βουταφίου, διὸ ἐπιδίδομεν. Ἀπολλώνιος ἐξηγητεύσας καὶ γυμνασιαρχήσας διὰ Διδᾶ γραμματέως γνωρίζω Ἀνουβᾶν Διδύμου τοῦ Ἥρωνος μητρὸς Ἴσειτος. ἔτους ε Ἀντωνείνου Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου μηνὸς Ἁδριανοῦ

P.Fay. 27Euhemeria (Arsinoites)AD 175

ἀμφόδου … ε … φρ … υ … … Πεκυσίωνος ἀπὸ ἀμφόδου Θεσμοφορείου … γνωρίζω τὸν ἐπικρινόμενον

P.Lund 6 6Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 190–AD 191

ιας ἀπὸ κώμης Τεπτύνεως … … … ων καὶ ἐγνώρισα τὴν ἰδίαν μου σφραγίδα … … … … vestiges ι … εις … vestiges

What if now desiring <the> God to show the wrath and to make known the power of Him bore with much patience [the] vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,
τὸho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASN — Article · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

What if now desiring <the> God to show the wrath and to make known the power of Him bore with much patience [the] vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,
δυνατὸνdunatos power G1415 Adjective · accusative · singular · neuter
32× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Able or powerful refers to someone or something with great strength or capability, as seen in Luke 1:49 and Romans 15:1. This term can describe physical or spiritual power, and is often used to express ability or possibility.
Amplified meaning
ability, capability
Tyndale gloss
able
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δυνατός (dunatos) means strong, mighty, or powerful, and can refer to physical strength or capability. It is used in contexts such as spiritual strength and ability to perform actions, as seen in Luke 14:31 and Romans 4:21. The neuter form δυνατόν signifies something that is possible, appearing in verses like Matthew 19:26. The lexicons agree on its general meanings without notable disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δυνατός, -ή, -όν

(< δύναμαι),

[in LXX for גִּבּוֹר, חַיִל, etc. ;]

strong, mighty, powerful: absol., Lk 1:49, 1 Col 1:26; οἱ δ., the chief men, Ac 25:5 ; of spiritual strength, Ro 15:1, II Co 12:10 13:9; seq. ἐν, Lk 24:19, Ac 7:22 18:24; πρός, II Co 10:4.

C. inf., able to do; Lk 14:31, Ac 11:17, Ro 4:21 11:23, II Ti…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δυνατός, -7, -dv, (δύναμαι) ; [fr. Pind. down], Sept. for 31; able, powerful, mighty, strong; 1. absolutely; a. mighty in wealth and influence: 1 Co. i. 26; (Rev. vi. 15 Rec.); οἱ δυνατοί, the chief men, Acts xxv. 5, (Joseph. b. j. 1, 12, 4 ἧκον ᾿Ιουδαίων οἱ δυνατοί; Xen. Cyr. 5, 4, 1; Thue. 1,89; Polyb. 9, 23,4). ὁ δυνατός, the preéminently mighty one, almighty God, Lk. i.49. b. strong in soul: to bear calamities and trials with fortitude and patience, 2 Co. xii. 10; strong in Christian virtue, 2 Co. xiii. 9; firm in conviction and faith, Ro. xv. 1. 2. in construction; a. δυνατός εἶμι with inf., to be able (to do something; [B. 260 (224); W. 319 (299) ]): Lk. xiv. 31; Acts xi. 17; Ro. iv. 21; xi. 23; xiv.4 RG; 2 Co.ix.8 RG; 2 Tim. i. 12; Tit.i. 9; Heb. xi. 19 (Lehm. δύναται) ; Jas. lil. 2. b. δυνατὸς ἔν τινι, mighty i. 6. excelling in something: ἐν ἔργῳ x. λόγῳ, Lk. xxiv. 19; ἐν λόγοις…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δυνατός. For δ. with a ‘‘complementary ” infinitive, as in 2 Tim 12, cf. P Magd 3° (B.c. 221), where in a lease it is laid down with reference to certain land—q δυνατὴ σπαρῆναι ἕως Xolax t τὴν δὲ μὴ δυνατὴν σπαρῆναι ἕως τ τοῦ Χοίαχ. For other exx. of the infin. construction cf P Eleph 818 (iii/B.c.) οὗτος δὲ δυνατός ἐστιν εἰσενέγκαι Kal ἔν[γυο]ν [t]k[ave]y, P Hib I. 781° 8.6. 244--3) ἐὰν δὲ μὴ δυνατὸς ἦσθα ἀπολῦσαι, P Giss I. 7911: ὁ (ii/A.p.) εἰ δυνατόν plow] ἦν διατρ[έ]χίειϊν πρὸς τὴν οἰκονομίαν τῶν ἡμετέρων, οὐκ ἂν ὠ[κἸνήκειν, P Leid Wit 18 {11 A.D.) ὅτι δυνατὸς εἶ (sc. ποιHoa κτλ,), Sy// 72118 (iv/B.c.) promising to render help καθ᾽ ὅτι ἂν ἦι δυνατός, etc. For the neuter δυνατόν see further P Petr ΤΙ. 11(1)8 (ες B.C. 252) εἰ δυνατόν ἐστιν καὶ μηθὲν σὲ τῶν ἔργων κωλύει, πειράθητι ἐλθεῖν εἰς τὰ ᾿Αρσινόεια, and cf. 2). 39 (g)!8 (middle iii/B.c.) διότι ὑπάρχει ἐν τῆι δωρεᾶι χόρτος…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δυνατός (dunatos) — able.

δῠνᾰτ-ός, ή, όν,

also ός, όν [Refs 5th c.BC+]:— strong, mighty, in body or mind, ὅ τι ἦν αὐτῶν δυνατώτατον the ablest-bodied men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; sound in limb, opposed to ἀδύνατος, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of ships, fit for service, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of things, δυνατώτερον ἀδικία δικαιοσύνης [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λόγος a powerful argument, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. with infinitive, able to do, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δ. λῦσαι mighty to loose, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; -ώτατοι καὶ τοῖς σώμασιν καὶ τοῖς χρήμασιν λῃτουργεῖν Decrees cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὅσονπερ δ. εἰμι, with infinitive omitted, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δυνατός

dunatos

from 1410; powerful or capable (literally or figuratively); neuter

possible:--able, could, (that is) mighty (man), possible, power,

strong.

see GREEK for 1410

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δυνατός, ή, όν

Adj

powerful, able, possible

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δυνατός dynatos 32x

able, having power, powerful, mighty; δυνατὸς εἶναι, to be able, i.q. δύνασθαι, Lk. 14:31; Acts 11:17; ὁ δυνατός, the Mighty One, God, Lk. 1:49; τὸ δυνατόν, power, i.q. δύναμις, Rom. 9:22; valid, powerful, efficacious, 2 Cor. 10:4; distinguished for rank, authority, or influence, Acts 25:5; 1 Cor. 1:26; distinguished for skill or excellence, Lk. 24:19; Acts 7:22; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δυνατός adjdu^na^t os_h_on suff_acc adjdu^na^t os_on suff_acc δύναμαι strong, mighty, able, esp. in body, τὸ δυνατώτατον the ablest-bodied men, Hdt.:—of ships, fit for service, Thuc.

c. inf. able to do, Hdt., etc.

powerful, id. Hdt.; οἱ δυνατοί the chief men of rank and influence, Thuc.

pass., of things, possible, Lat. quod fieri possit, Hdt., etc.:— δυνατόν [ἐστι], c. inf., id. Hdt., Aesch., etc.; ὁδὸς δυνατὴ καὶ τοῖς ὑποζυγίοις πορεύεσθαι practicable, Xen.: —κατὰ τὸ δυνατόν, quantum fieri possit, Plat., etc.; so, ἐς τὸ δ. Hdt.; ὅσον δυνατόν Eur., etc.

adv. -τῶς, strongly, powerfully, Aeschin.; δ. ἔχει it is possible, Hdt.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-ASN — Adjective · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-ASN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

pou'-er: This word, indicative of might, strength, force, is used in the Old Testament to render very many Hebrew terms, the translation in numerous instances being varied in the Revised Version (British and American) to words like "valor," "rule," "strength," "might," "dominion." The principal words for "power" in the New Testament are dunamis, and exousia. In the latter case the Revised Version (British and American) frequently changes to "authority" (Mr 3:15; 6:7; Eph 1:21, etc.) or "right" (Ro 9:21; 1Co 9:6; 2Th 3:9, etc.). Power is attributed preeminently to God (1Ch…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ OF CHRIST

As the Son of God, is the power of God Joh 5:17-19; 10:28-30

As man, is from the Father Ac 10:38

Described as supreme Eph 1:20,21; 1Pe 3:22

Unlimited Mt 28:18

Over all flesh Joh 17:2

Over all things Joh 3:35; Eph 1:22

Glorious 2Th 1:9

Everlasting 1Ti 6:16

Is able to subdue all things Php 3:21

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
41%possible
possible41% · 13×able25% · 8×mighty9% · 3×strong9% · 3×power6% · 2×powerful6% · 2×mighty one3% · 1×

32 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
predicate84%subject13%object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 32 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
εἰCond
πλανάωI lead astray, dἐγώἀποπλανάωI cause to wande
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
θεόςGod, a godδύναμαιI am powerful, aπατήρfather, Father,
Article the
μέγαςγνωρίζωI make known, deἐγώ
εἰμίI am, exist
οὐNegτίςIrg
δέbut, on the other ha
εἰμίI am, existσύ
δυνατόςpower32×
what comes after →
εἰμίI am, exist
παρέρχομαιI pass byἐνκαίand, even, also,
Article the
θεόςGod, a godπιστεύωI believe, have ἐκλεκτόςchosen, elect, c
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theἅγιοςset apart, holy,
παρά
Article the
ἐν
ἔργονwork, labor, actλόγοςa word, speech,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδυνατός · 32× in the New Testament
Acts Mark Romans Luke 2 Corinthians Matthew 1 Corinthians 2 Timothy Galatians Hebrews James Titus
Across the New Testament12 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 69 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 151c. AD 40

μέχρι μὲν γὰρ εἷς ἦν, ὡμοιοῦτο κατὰ τὴν μόνωσιν κόσμῳ καὶ θεῷ καὶ τῆς ἑκατέρου φύσεως ἐναπεμάττετο τῇ ψυχῇ τοὺς χαρακτῆρας, οὐ πάντας ἀλλ’ ὅσους χωρῆσαι δυνατὸν θνητὴν σύστασιν·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.253c. AD 75–95

ᾧ τῶν μὲν ἐκεῖ γυναικῶν δυνατὸν αὐτῷ τὴν εὐδαιμονεστάτην λαβεῖν οὐκ ἠξίωσεν ἀγαγέσθαι, τιμῶν δὲ τὸ γένος τὸν γάμον πολιτεύει τοῦτον.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 48.5c. AD 96

ἤτω τις πιστός, ἤτω δυνατὸς γνῶσιν ἐξειπεῖν, ἤτω σοφὸς ἐν διακρίσει λόγων, ἤτω ἁγνὸς ἐν ἔργοις.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD
P.Mich. Zen. 57Arsinoites249 BC

αὐτὸς ἀπὸ σαυτοῦ ἀπομεριμνήσας ἐντυχεῖν· οὐ γὰρ ἐπιτήδειον ἦν ἡμᾶς γράφειν, ἀκηκόαμεν δὲ καὶ δυνατόν σε πορίσαι προστάγματα εἰς τὸ τιμωρηθῆναι αὐτούς. γίνωσκε οὖν ἐντυχόντος Δημέου Φανίαι κατὰ Ἀλκέτου

Feste 60243 BC–242 BC

τυχὼν ἐπιστάτου εἰσέλθω εἰς τοὺς ἀγῶνας οὓς ὁ βασιλεὺς προτίθησιν καὶ μὴ καταφθαρῶ ἐνταῦθα, δυνατὸς ὦ δʼ ἐμαυτῶι βοηθῆσαι. ἔρρωσθε. ἔτους ϛ, μηνὸς

P.Lond. 2 p. 305 no. 404Philadelphia? (Arsinoites)AD 346

κύριε, ἐλθεῖν πρὸς ἡμᾶς, καὶ εὐθέως γείνεται τὸ ἔργον· ἐξήτακα γὰρ, καὶ λέγουσιν ὅτι δυνατόν ἐστιν. ἀσπάζομαι τὴν Νόνναν καὶ τὸν γλυκύτατον Κωνστάντιν. ἀσπάζομαι Μαρτύριον. ἀσπάζομαι Εὐφρόνιν. ἀσπάζομαι Σύρον

What if now desiring <the> God to show the wrath and to make known the power of Him bore with much patience [the] vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,
αὐτοῦautos of Him G846 Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Romans than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-GSM — Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-GSM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςof Him5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

What if now desiring <the> God to show the wrath and to make known the power of Him bore with much patience [the] vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,
ἤνεγκενpherō bore G5342 Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
68× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Romans than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To bear or lead, meaning to carry or support something or someone, as seen in Luke 23:26 and Hebrews 1:3. It can also mean to endure or bring something forward. This word is used in various contexts, including physical and mental support.
Amplified meaning
endured, tolerated
Tyndale gloss
to bear/lead
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

φέρω (phero) is a versatile Greek verb meaning to bear, carry, or bring. It can imply physical carrying, enduring, or producing something, and is used in various contexts throughout the New Testament, such as in Luke 23:26 and Hebrews 1:3. The word is built from roots suggesting motion and can also convey metaphorical meanings, like being influenced or prompted. Notably, lexicons differ on the nuances of its use in specific contexts.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — φέρω, φορέω from a scan

On the distinction between these words Lobeck (Phrynichus, p. 585) has the following remarks: ‘ Inter φέρω et φορέω hoc interesse constat, quod iilud actionem simplicem et transitoriam, hoc autem actionis ejusdem continuationem significat ; verbi caus ἀγγελίην φέρειν, est alicujus rei nuncium afferre, Herod. iii. 53 et 122; v.143 ἀγγελίην φορέειν, ili. 34, nuncii munere apud aliquem fungi. Hine et φορεῖν dicimur ea que nobiscum circumferimus, quibus amicti indutique sumus, ut ἱμάτιον, τριβώνιον, δακτύλιον φορεῖν, tum que ad habitum corporis pertinent.’ He proceeds, however, to acknowledge that this distinction is by no means constantly observed even by the best Greek authors. It is, therefore, the more noticeable, as an example of that accuracy which so often takes us by surprise in the use of words by the writers of the N. T., that they are always true to this rule. On the six…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

φέρω

[in LXX chiefly for בּוֹא. hi., also for נשׂא, etc. ;]

to bear;

to bear, carry: c. acc, Lk 23:26 24:1, Jo 19:39, He 1:3 (v. Westc., in l.); pass., Ac 2:2 27:15, 17 He 6:1, II Pe 1:17, 18; of the mind, II Pe 1:21.

to bear, endure: c. acc. rei, He 12:20 13:13; c. acc pers., Ro 9:22.

to bring, bring forward: c. acc. pers., Ac 5:16; id. seq. πρός, Mk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

φέρω; (allied to Germ. fahren, fahren, [Eng. bear, etc. Scotch bairn, ete. etc.; οἵ. Curtius §411]); impf. ἔφεpov; Pass., pres. φέρομαι ; impf. ἐφερόμην ; fut. act. οἴσω (Jn. xxi. 18; Rev. xxi. 26) 5 1 aor. ἤνεγκα, ptep. ἐνέγκας; 2 aor. inf. ἐνεγκεῖν (Mt. vii. 18T WH); 1 aor. pass. ἠνέχθην (2 Pet. i. 17, 21); [ef WH. App. p. 164; B. 68 (60); W.90 (85sq.); esp. Veitch p. 668 sq.]; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 827 and Nw); do bear, ie. 1 10 carry; a. to carry some burden: τὸν σταυρὸν ome σθέν τινος, Lk. xxiii. 26 ; to bear with one’s self (which the Grk. writ. express by the mid.), [A. V. to bring]: τί, Lk. xxiv. 1; Jn. xix. 39. b. to move by bearing; pass. like the Lat. feror i.g. moveor, to be conveyed or borne, with a suggestion of speed or force (often so in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down): of persons borne in a ship over the sea, [A. V. to be driven], Acts xxvii. 15,17; of a gust of wind, to…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

φέρω. (1) “bring,”’ “carry”: P Tebt II. 418% (iii/a.p.) καλῶς ποιήσεις, ἄδελφε, [elav εἰσέρχῃ ἐνεγκὼν μετὰ σεαυτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκά μου, ‘you will do well, brother, to come up and bring my wife with you” (Edd.), 26. 42158 (ili/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 106) τὸ κιτώνιον αὐτῆς τὸ λευκὸν τὸ παρὰ col ἔνιγκον épx[d]pevos, τὸ δὲ καλλάϊνον μ[ὴ] ἐνίγκῃς, “her tunic, the white one which you have, bring when you come, but the turquoise one do not bring,” P Grenf IT. 73% (late iii/A.p.) (as now read by Deissmann LAE* Ὁ. 214) ot νεκροτάφοι ἐνηνόχασιν (cf. Pro/eg. p. 154) ἐνθάδε εἰς Toerd τὴν ἸΤολιτικὴν τὴν πεμφθεῖσαν εἰς ἤθασιν ὑπὸ τῆς ἡγεμονίας, ‘‘the grave-diggers have brought here to Toéto Politika, who had been sent into the Oasis by the government,’ P Fay 1343 (early iv/A.D.) φέρων εἰ δόξαν σοι τὴν ὕαλον, “bring, if you please, the crystal” (Edd.), and 26. 1367 (iv/a.D.) ἀπαντήσατε ἀπ᾽ ἑαυτῶν mpd τοῦ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

φέρω (pherō) — to bear/lead.

φέρω

(Locrian dialect φάρω [ᾰ], [Refs 5th c.BC+], only present and imperfect (late 1 aorist 3rd.pers. plural ἤφεραν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Epic dialect forms, 2nd pers. plural imperative φέρτε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 2nd pers. singular subjunctive φέρῃσθα [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular subjunctive φέρῃσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect infinitive φερέμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]imperfect ἔφερον, Epic dialect φέρον [Refs]; also φέρεσκε, φέρεσκον (3rd.pers. plural), [Refs 8th c.BC+]

II. future οἴσω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Doric dialect οἰσῶ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural οἰσεῦμες [Refs]; 3rd.pers. plural ηοίσοντι [Refs]: the following active forms are not future in sense, imperative οἶσε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural οἰσόντων [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive οἴσειν [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

φέρω

phero

a primary verb -- for which other, and apparently not cognate ones are

used in certain tenses only; namely,

oio oy'-o;

and enegko en-eng'-ko

to "bear" or carry (in a very wide application, literally and

figuratively, as follows):--be, bear, bring (forth), carry, come, +

let her drive, be driven, endure, go on, lay, lead, move, reach,

rushing, uphold.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

φέρω

v.

I carry, bear, bring, lead

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

φέρω pherō 66x

to bear, carry, Mk. 2:3; to bring, Mt. 14:11, 18; to conduct, Mt. 17:17; Jn. 21:18; to bear, endure, Rom. 9:22; Heb. 12:20; 13:13; to uphold, maintain, conserve, Heb. 1:3; to bear, bring forth, produce, Mk. 4:8; Jn. 12:24; 15:2; to bring forward, advance, allege, Jn. 18:29; Acts…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

φέρω from Root ἘΝΕΚ or ἘΝΕΓΚ come ἤνεγκον and ἤνεικα from Root ΟΙ comes οἴσω in pl. always Radic. sense, to bear, Lat. fero:

to bear or carry a load, Hom., attic; of a woman with child, Aesch., Soph.

to bear, bear along, implying motion, πόδες φέρον Il.; horses are said ἅρμα φέρειν id. Il.; of a wind, Hom.; ὁ βορέας εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα φέρει is fair for Greece, Xen.

to bear, endure, suffer, Od., etc.; of wine, τὰ τρία φέρων bearing three parts of water, instead of ἴσον ἴσωι, Ar.:—often with Advs., βαρέως, δεινῶς, χαλεπῶς φέρειν τι, like Lat. aegre, graviter ferre, to bear impatiently, take ill or amiss, opp. to κούφως, ῥαιδίως φέρειν, Lat. leviter ferre, to bear patiently, take easily, Hdt., attic:—such phrases are constructed mostly c. acc. rei; sometimes, c. dat. only, βαρέως φέρειν τοῖς παροῦσι…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAI-3S — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

bor: According to the Book of the Covenant (Ex 20:20-23:33) a slave whom his master had purchased was to be released after six years. Should he choose to remain in his master's service a religious ceremony was necessary to ratify his decision. "Then his master shall bring him unto God" (better than "unto the judges" of the King James Version), "and shall bring him to the door, or unto the doorpost; and his master shall bore his ear through with an awl" (Ex 21:6). It is highly improbable that "unto God" means "to a sanctuary"; for there was no special reason for performing this ceremony near the door of a sanctuary. On the other hand the entrance to a private house was a sacred spot. According to primitive thinking near the door dwelt the household gods whose function it was to…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
14%do bring
do bring14% · 9×bearing8% · 5×bringing6% · 4×brought6% · 4×they bring5% · 3×they were bringing3% · 2×having brought3% · 2×they brought3% · 2×other renderings53% · 35×

66 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 68 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
κοράσιονa girl, little gαὐξάνωI cause to increφυλακήa watching, guar
καρπόςfruit, result, gain
πολύςmuch, many, ofteArticle theδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ἔρχομαιI come, go
καίand, even, also,μνῆμαa tomb, monumentΚάρποςCarpus
αὐτός
δυνατόςpowerful, able, ὑπόστασιςassurance, substὀνειδισμόςreproach, revili
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existδιδαχήteaching, doctri
φέρωbore68×
what comes after →
Article the
κεφαλήthe headδόξαhonor, renown, gμήτηρa mother
αὐτός
πρόςκωφόςdumb, deafτυφλόςblind
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakγίνομαιI come into bein
ἐγώ
ὧδεhereαὐτόςδηνάριονa denarius
πρός
αὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceφέρω · 68× in the New Testament
John Mark Acts Matthew 2 Peter Hebrews Luke Revelation 1 Peter 2 John 2 Timothy Romans
Across the New Testament12 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 142 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 46c. AD 40

ταῖς διανοίαις ἐπὶ τὴν πρώτην τῶν ὅλων γένεσιν, ὅτε πρὸ ἡλίου καὶ σελήνης παντοῖα μὲν φυτά, παντοίους δὲ καρποὺς ἤνεγκεν ἡ γῆ, καὶ θεασάμενοι ταῖς διανοίαις ἐλπιζέτωσαν ὅτι καὶ αὖθις οἴσει κατὰ πρόσταξιν τοῦ πατρός, ὅταν αὐτῷ δοκῇ μὴ προσδεηθέντι…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.2c. AD 75–95

τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.5c. AD 100

ἐὰν φέρητε σεμίδαλιν, μάταιον: θυμίαμα βδέλυγμά μοί ἐστιν: τὰς νεομηνίας ὑμῶν καὶ τὰ σάββατα οὐκ ἀνέχομαι.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC
PSI 4 436Philadelphia (Arsinoites)249 BC

ποιήσαις ἐνθυμηθεὶς ἵνα μηθεὶς ἡμᾶς τῶν ὑπὸ σὲ γραμματέων ἀδικῆι. τὰ δὲ ἄλλα ὁ φέρων σοι τὴν ἐπιστολὴν ἐρεῖ. ἔρρωσο.

P.Dryton 44Pathyris (?)155 BC–143 BC

γε ἐμβαδικὸν νήσου πυροῦ ξ καὶ κάτεργον ἁμάξης πυροῦ κε γίνονται πε ὧν φέρει … προέχειν Μυρσίνην κροτῶνος α, τῆι αὐτῆι δέδωκα ὅτε ἔτεκεν κροτῶνος 𐅵 γίνεται α

ιβιος τέκνων … … ος ἐπὶ κλίμακος … … Διδυμ διὰ Πέλοπος … ηνέχθη πρὸς … αὐτ Σεντοτοέους … ἐξ Ἑρμώνθ … ταριχευτ … μονκαμεν διὰ Στάχυος

What if now desiring <the> God to show the wrath and to make known the power of Him bore with much patience [the] vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,
ἐνen with G1722 Preposition
2,743× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word is a preposition that means in, on, or among something. It's used in many places, like Matthew 7:3 and Luke 7:37, to describe a location or relationship. It can also mean by, with, or during.
Tyndale gloss
in/on/among
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν,

prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).

Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐν (en) — in/on/among.

ἐν,

poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]

__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.

__A WITH DAT.

__A.I OF PLACE,

__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐν

en

a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or

state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or

constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519

and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +

almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+

all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,

-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,

one, X quickly,

X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),

through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,

with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same

import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate

direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)

preposition.

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐν

Prep.

in, on, among

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐν en 2x

followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐν

e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.

Lat. in.

PREP. WITH DAT.:

OF PLACE

in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.

in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.

in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.

in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.

in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
79%in
in79% · 2226×with5% · 135×among5% · 132×by4% · 112×on3% · 72×other renderings4% · 116×other renderings1% · 40×

2,833 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 36 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial82%predicate11%object3%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,743 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,πᾶςall, the whole, σύ
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύεἰμίI am, exist
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the othe
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,οὐNeg
ἐγώ
μετάπατήρfather, Father, εἰς
ἐνwith2743×
what comes after →
Article the
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaἡμέραa dayκαρδίαthe heart, inner
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,Article theμένωI remain, abide
σύ
εἰμίI am, existμένωI remain, abideκαίand, even, also,
ὅς
καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, existArticle the
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
Article theτόποςa placeσοφίαwisdom

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐν · 2,743× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Acts John Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Revelation Mark Ephesians Colossians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
What if now desiring <the> God to show the wrath and to make known the power of Him bore with much patience [the] vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,
πολλῇpolus much G4183 Adjective · dative · singular · feminine
413× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means much or many, and is used to describe things like large crowds, as in Mark 5:24, or a great amount of time, as in Matthew 25:19. It emphasizes the magnitude of something.
Tyndale gloss
much
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πολύς (polus) means much or many, covering a range of contexts from quantity to degree and value. It appears as an adjective and can also function as a noun or adverb. In the New Testament, it is used to describe large numbers of people or things, as seen in verses like Matthew 9:37 and John 6:10. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πολύς, πολλή, πολύ,

[in LXX chiefly for רַב and cognate forms;]

as adj., much, many, great, of number, space, degree, value, time, etc.: ἀριθμός, Ac 11:21; ὄχλος, Mk 5:24; θερισμός, Mt 9:37; χόρτος, Jo 6:10; χρόνος, Mt 25:19; γογγυσμός, Jo 7:12; πόνος, Col 4:13; δόξα, Mt 24:30; σιγή, Ac 21:40; pl., προφῆται, Mt 13:17; ὄχλοι, Mt 4:25; δαιμόνια, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πολύς, πολλή (fr. an older form πολλός, found in Hom., Hes., Pind.), πολύ; [(cf. Curtius § 375)]; Sept. chiefly for 39; much; used a. of multitude, number, etc., many, numerous, great: ἀριθμός, Acts xi. 21; λαός, Acts xviii. 10; ὄχλος, Mk. v. 24; vi. 34; [viii.1 LT Tr WH]; Lk. vii. 11; viii. 4; Jn. vi. 2,5; Rev. vii. 9; xix. 6, etc.; πλῆθος, Mk. iii. 7sq.; Lk. v. 6; Acts xiv. 1, ete.; 1. q. abundant, plenteous [A. V. often much], καρπός, Jn. xii. 24; xv. 5,8; θερισμός, (the harvest to be gathered), Mt. ix. 37; Lk. x. 2; γῆ, Mt. xiii. 5; Mk. iv. 5; χόρτος, Jn. vi. 10; οἶνος, 1 Tim. iii. 8; plur. πολλοὶ τελῶναι, Mt. ix. 10; Mk. ii. 15; πολλοὶ προφῆται, Mt. xiii. 17; Lk. x. 24; σοφοί, 1 Co. i. 26; πατέρες, 1 Co. iv. 15; δυνάμεις, Mt. vii. 22; xiii. 58, ete.; ὄχλοι, Mt. iv. 25; viii. 1; xii. 15 [but here L TWH om. Trbr. ὄχ.7; Lk. v. 15, ete.; δαιμόνια, Mk.i. 34; and in many otherexx.; with…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πολύς, “much,” plur. ‘‘many’’: P Petr I. 2905 (iii/B.c.) χάρις τοῖς θεοῖς πολλὴ εἰ ὑγιαίνεις, ‘‘much thanks to the gods if you are well,” P Ryl II. 2435 (ii/A.D.) τοῦτο οὐ μόνον ἡμεῖν yevapevov ἀλλὰ Kal πολλοῖς, ‘this has happened not to us only but to many ” (Edd.), and 16. 238* (A.p. 262) διὰ πολλὰς χρείας, “for various needs’ (Edd.). The word is very conimon in epistolary greetings (πολλὰ χαίρειν : exx. from B.C. 118 to ili/iv A.D. in Exler Eprstolography p. 27 f.) and in rhetorical prefaces (Sirach proem.), and consequently, as Cadbury suggests (in Jackson and Lake Beginnings of Christianity Part I. Vol. ii. p. 492 f.), πολλοί must not be pressed to mean “ἡ Ac 243, 10, For the adverbial πολλά, which ‘‘ lies between πολύ and πολλάκις : it is ‘much’ with the idea of plurality and repetition introduced’’ (Hort ad Jas 32), cf. P Heid 622 (iv/a.p.) (= Selections, p. 127) πολλὰ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πολύς (polus) — much.

πολύς,

Attic dialect πολλή, πολ; genitive πολλοῦ, ῆς, ou=; dative πολλῷ, ῇ, ; accusative πολύν, πολλήν, πολύ:—Ionic dialect πολλός [Refs 6th c.BC+], πολλή, πολλόν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; also in Trag., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; accusative πολλόν, πολλήν, πολλόν: [Refs 5th c.BC+] uses the Ionic dialect forms, but codices have πολύν [Refs 1st c.AD+]:—both sets of forms are found in Epic dialect, also genitive singular πολέος [Refs 8th c.BC+], once contraction πολεῖς [Refs]; dative πολέσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; accusative πολέας (trisyllable) [Refs 8th c.BC+] (frequently with variant{πολεῖς} [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in later Epic dialect πολέες is used as feminine, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]:—Epic dialect also have πουλύς (once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; these forms are found in codices of [Refs 5th c.BC+] — Lyric poetry and Trag. (Lyric poetry) sometimes use Epic dialect forms, dative singular…

Read the full entry →
Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πολύς, πολλή, πολύ

Adj

much, many, often

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πολύς polys 416x

great in magnitude or quantity, much, large, Mt. 13:5; Jn. 3:23; 15:8; pl. many, Mt. 3:7; in time, long, Mt. 25:19; Mk. 6:35; Jn. 5:6; οἱ πολλοί, the many, the mass, Rom. 5:15; 12:5; 1 Cor. 10:33; τὸ πολύ, much, 2 Cor. 8:15; πολύ, as an adv., much, greatly, Mk. 12:27; Lk. 7:47; of…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πολύς the ionic declension πολλός, ή, όν is retained by the attic in all cases, except the nom. and acc. masc. and neut. Hom. uses both ionic and attic forms. of Number, many, opp. to ὀλίγος, Hom., etc.;— with nouns of multitude, πουλὺς ὅμιλος Od.; πολλὸν πλῆθος Hdt., etc.:—also of anything often repeated, πολλὸν ἦν τοῦτο τὸ ἔπος id. Hdt.; πολλὸς αἰνεόμενος id. Hdt.; τούτῳ πολλῷ χρήσεται τῷ λόγῳ often, Dem.

of Size, Degree, Force, much, mighty, great, Il., etc.; π. ὕπνος deep sleep, Od.; π. ὑμέναιος a loud song, Il., etc.:—rarely of a single person, μέγας καὶ πολλὸς ἐγένεο Hdt.; ἢν πολλῇ ῥυῇ if she flow with full stream, metaph. from a river, Eur.; πολλῷ ῥέοντι Dem.; from the wind, πολὺς ἔπνει was blowing strong, id. Dem.; often with a Partic., πολλὸς ἦν λισσόμενος…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-DSF — Adjective · dative · singular · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-DSF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%many
many52% · 196×great17% · 66×much17% · 65×many things6% · 21×other renderings6% · 23×other renderings2% · 7×

378 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 20 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject36%adverbial29%object22%predicate10%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 354 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,ὅςεἰς
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἀπώλειαdestruction, ruiἀπέρχομαιI come or go awa
ὄχλοςa crowd
αὐτόςὁράωI see, look uponκαίand, even, also,
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theὁράωI see, look uponμετά
αὐτός
παρακαλέωI summon, entreaἀκολουθέωI accompany, attλαλέωI speak, say
πολύςmuch413×
what comes after →
Article the
δέbut, on the otheπρῶτοςfirst, beforeσυναναβαίνωI go up with
καίand, even, also, nam
ὡςas, like as, howθεραπεύωI care for, atteεὐθέωςimmediately, soo
δέbut, on the other ha
εἰμίI am, existἐκτέραςa wonder, porten
γάρfor
ἔρχομαιI come, goεἰμίI am, existπάσχωI am acted upon,
μᾶλλονmore, rather
Article theκράζωI cry aloud, shrσύ

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπολύς · 413× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Mark Matthew John 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans Revelation Hebrews 1 Timothy 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament25 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 335 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.1c. AD 75–95

Τοῖς τὰς ἱστορίας συγγράφειν βουλομένοις οὐ μίαν οὐδὲ τὴν αὐτὴν ὁρῶ τῆς σπουδῆς γινομένην αἰτίαν, ἀλλὰ πολλὰς καὶ πλεῖστον ἀλλήλων διαφερούσας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 38Pathyrites171 BC

τῶι προγεγραμμένωι ἱερῶι, ὁ ἐνκεκλημένος προσπηδήσας μοι ἐνώπιόν τινων ἔτυπτεν ἧι εἶχεν ῥάβδωι πληγαῖς πλειόσιν εἰς τὸ τυχὸν μέρος τοῦ σώματός μου. ὅ τε περιεβλήμην, ὀθόνιον κατέρηξεν, περὶ ὦν

P.Grenf. 1 42Diospolis Parva170 BC–169 BC

νυνὶ παρεφεδρευόντων ἐν Διὸς πόλει τῆι μικρᾶι ἀπὸ τῶν ἐν τῶι ἐν Πτολεμαίδι ὑπαίθρωι. πολλὰς χρείας μισθοφόρων ἱππέων παρεσχημένων ἡμῶν ἤδη πολλάκις κατὰ τὸν πόλεμον καὶ κινδύνους μεγάλους

μέρους ἡμίσους ἀπὸ ἐδάφους ἀμπελῶνος ἀρουρῶν β ἡμίσους ἢ ὅσαν ἂν ἦι ἐπὶ τὸ πλεῖον καὶ τοῦ ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου αὐτοῦ παραδείσου καὶ φρεάτων καὶ ἐποικίων καὶ ληνῶνος καὶ γῆς

What if now desiring <the> God to show the wrath and to make known the power of Him bore with much patience [the] vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,
μακροθυμίᾳmakrothumia patience G3115 Noun · dative · singular · feminine
14× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Patience refers to longanimity and fortitude, as seen in Colossians 1:11 and 2 Timothy 3:10. It involves experiencing troubles and difficulties with endurance, and is also a characteristic of God's forbearance in Romans 2:4.
Amplified meaning
longanimity, fortitude
Tyndale gloss
patience
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

μακροθυμία (makrothumia) means patience or longsuffering, particularly in enduring difficulties or in showing forbearance. It is often associated with God's patience towards humanity, as seen in various New Testament passages like Romans 2:4 and 1 Peter 3:20. The term is built from the components for 'long' and 'spirit' or 'temper.' Some sources note a distinction between μακροθυμία and ὑπομονή, suggesting different nuances in their meanings.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — μακροθυμία, ὑπομονή, ἀνοχή from a scan

BETWEEN μακροθυμία and ὑπομονή, which occur together at Col. i. 11, and in the same context 2 Cor. vi. 4,6 ; 2 Tim. iii. 10; Jam. v. 10, 11 (cf. Clement of Rome, 64 ; Ignatius, Hphes. 8), Chrysostom draws the following distinction ; that a man paxpoθυμεῖ, who having power to revenge himself, yet refrains from the exercise of this power ; while he ὑπομένει, who having no choice but to bear, and only the alternative of a patient or impatient bearing, has grace to choose theformer. Thus the faithful, he concludes, would commonly be called to exercise the former grace among themselves (1 Cor. vi. 7), the latter in their commerce with those that were without: μακροθυμίαν πρὸς ἀλλήλους, ὑπομονὴν πρὸς τοὺς ἔξω" μακροθυμεῖ γάρ τις πρὸς ἐκείνους οὺς δυνατὸν καὶ ἀμύνασθαι, ὑπομένει δὲ ods οὐ δύναται ἀμύνασθαι. This distinction, however, will not endure a closer examination ; for see decisively…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

† μακροθυμία, -ας, ἡ

(< μακρό-θυμος),

[in LXX: Pr 25:15 (אַפַּיִם אֹרֶךְ), Je 15:15 (אַפַּיִם אֶרֶךְ) Is 57:15, Si 5:11, I Mac 8:4*;]

patience, longsuffering: of men, esp. in experiencing troubles and difficulties, Col 1:11, II Ti 3:10, He 6:12, Ja 5:10; of God's forbearance, Ro 2:4 9:22, II Co 6:6, Ga 5:22, Eph 4:2, Col 3:12, I Ti 1:16,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μακροθυμία, -as, 7, (μακρόθυμος [ cf. waxpobupéw]), (Vulg. longanimitas, ete.), i. 6. 1. patience, endurance, constancy, steadfastness, perseverance; esp. as shown in bearing troubles and ills, (Plut. Luc. 32 sq.; ἄνθρωπος ὧν ( μᾶλλον μηδέποτε τὴν ἀλυπίαν αἰτοῦ παρὰ θεῶν, ἀλλὰ μακροθυμίαν, Menand. frag. 19, p. 203 ed. Meineke [vol. iy. p. 238 Frag. comic. Graec. (Berl. 1841)]): Col. i. 11; 2 Tim. iii. 10; Heb. vi. 12; Jas. v.10; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 64; Barn. ep. 2, 2; [Is. lvii. 15; Joseph. Ὁ. j. 6, 1, 5; ef. 1 Mace. viii. 4]. 2. patience, forbearance, long-suffering, slowness in avenging wrongs, (for D'DN 718, Jer. xv. 15): Ro. ii. 4; ix. 22; 2Co. vi.6; Gal. v. 22; Eph. iv. 2; Col. 111. 12; 1 Tim. i. 16 [cf. B. 120 (105)]; 2 Tim. iv. 2; 1 Pet. iii. 20; 2 Pet. iii. 15; (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 13, 1; Ignat. ad Eph. 3…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μακροθυμία (makrothumia) — patience.

μακρο-θῡμία,

Ionic dialect -ιη, ἡ, long-suffering, patience, [NT+4th c.BC+]

2. forbearance, [LXX+NT]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

μακροθυμία

makrothumia

from the same as 3116; longanimity, i.e. (objectively) forbearance or

(subjectively) fortitude:--longsuffering, patience.

see GREEK for 3116

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μακροθυμία, ας, ἡ

n.f.

patience, forbearance

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μακροθυμία makrothumia 14x

patience; patient enduring of evil, fortitude, Col. 1:11; Col. 3:12; 1 Tim. 1:16; 1 Pet. 3:20; slowness of avenging injuries, long-suffering, forbearance, clemency, Rom. 2:4; 9:22; 2 Cor. 6:6; Gal. 5:22; Eph. 4:2; 2 Tim. 4:2; Jas. 5:10; patient expectation, 2 Tim. 3:10; Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DSF — Noun · dative · singular · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

pa'-shens (hupomone, makrothumia): "Patience" implies suffering, enduring or waiting, as a determination of the will and not simply under necessity. As such it is an essential Christian virtue to the exercise of which there are many exhortations. We need to "wait patiently" for God, to endure uncomplainingly the various forms of sufferings, wrongs and evils that we meet with, and to bear patiently injustices which we cannot remedy and provocations we cannot remove.

The word "patience" does not occur in the Old Testament, but we have "patiently" in Ps 40:1 as the translation of qawah, "to wait," "to expect," which word frequently expresses the idea, especially that of waiting on God; in Ps 37:7, "patiently" ("wait patiently") is the translation of qul, one of the meanings of which…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ General scriptures concerning Ps 37:7-9; Pr 15:18; Ec 7:8,9; La 3:26,27; Lu 8:15; 21:19; Ro 2:7; 5:3,4; 8:25; 12:12; 15:4,5; 1Co 13:4,5; 2Co 6:4-6; 12:12; Ga 6:9; Eph 4:1,2; Col 1:10,11; 3:12,13; 1Th 1:3; 5:14;

- God, is the God of

Ro 15:5

- Christ, an example of

Isa 53:7; Ac 8:32; Mt 27:14

- Enjoined

Tit 2:2; 2Pe 1:6

- Should have its perfect work

Jas 1:4

- Trials of saints lead to

Ro 5:3; Jas 1:3

- PRODUCES

. Experience

Ro 5:4

. Hope

Ro 15:4

- Suffering with, for well-doing, is acceptable with God

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
93%patience
patience93% · 13×longsuffering7% · 1×

14 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial50%object29%predicate7%second object7%subject7%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 14 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,πίστιςfaith, belief, t
καίand, even, also, nam
ὑπομονήendurance, steadπίστιςfaith, belief, t
πολύςmuch, many, often
ἐν
ἐν
γνῶσιςknowledge, doctr
εἰρήνηpeace, peace of mind
χαράjoy, gladness
μακροθυμίαpatience14×
what comes after →
ἐν
χρηστότηςgoodness, benignἡμέραa day
Article the
ἀγάπηloveπροφήτηςa prophet, poet
καταφρονέωI despise, scorn
ἀγνοέωI do not know, a
σκεῦοςa vessel to contain
ὀργήanger, wrath, pa
χρηστότηςgoodness, benignity,
ἀγαθωσύνηgoodness

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμακροθυμία · 14× in the New Testament
2 Timothy Colossians Romans 1 Peter 1 Timothy 2 Corinthians 2 Peter Ephesians Galatians Hebrews James
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch Josephus The Epistle of Barnabas
JosephusThe Jewish War 6.37c. AD 75–95

πρῶτον μὲν οὖν ὑμῶν γενέσθω προτροπὴ τό τινας ἴσως ἀποτρέπον, ἡ Ἰουδαίων μακροθυμία καὶ τὸ καρτερικὸν ἐν οἷς κακοπαθοῦσιν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.2c. AD 100

τῆς οὖν πίστεως ἡμῶν εἰσιν βοηθοὶ φόβος καὶ ὑπομονή, τὰ δὲ συμμαχοῦντα ἡμῖν μακροθυμία καὶ ἐγκράτεια:

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 10.1.3c. AD 140

ἐν γὰρ τῇ μακροθυμίᾳ ὁ κύριος κατοικεῖ, ἐν δὲ τῇ ὀξυχολίᾳ ὁ διάβολος.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD
P.Lond. 6 1917Herakleopolites bzw. KynopolitesAD 330–AD 340

μετὰ εἰρήνης βεβαιοτάτης ἐξ ἁγίου πνεύματος καὶ μετὰ ἱλαρότητος θεῷ μεμελημένος καὶ μετὰ φιλοξενίας μακροθυμίας πεπληρωμένος πνεύματος ἁγίου. σοὶ οὖν γράφω, γνησιώτατε καὶ βεβαιότατε ἄπα Παιηοῦ παρὰ κυρίῳ θεῷ,

What if now desiring <the> God to show the wrath and to make known the power of Him bore with much patience [the] vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,
σκεύηskeuos [the] vessels G4632 Noun · accusative · plural · neuter
23× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A vessel or implement, this word can refer to a container, a wife, or even a ship's sail. It appears in Mark 11:16 and Revelation 18:12, highlighting its various uses.
Amplified meaning
containers, instruments
Tyndale gloss
vessel
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σκεῦος is a neuter noun meaning a vessel or implement, often used in various contexts including household utensils, military equipment, and ship gear. In the New Testament, it appears in verses like Mark 11:16 and Romans 9:21, where it can also metaphorically refer to people, such as 'vessels of mercy' or 'vessels of wrath.' The term can denote both physical objects and the body as a vessel for the soul.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σκεῦος, -ους, τό

[in LXX chiefly for כְּלִי ;]

a vessel, implement (for exx. in various senses, v. MM, xxii): Mk 11:16, Lk 8:16, Jo 19:29, Ac 10:11, 16 11:5, Ro 9:21, Re 18:12; pl., II Ti 2:20, Re 2:27; τὰ σ. τῆς λειτουργίας, He 9:21; pl., τὰ σ., utensils, goods, Mt 12:29, Mk 3:27, Lk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σκεῦος, -ous, τό, [prob. fr. τ. sku ‘to cover’; οἵ. Lat. scutum, cutis, obscurus; Curtius § 113; Vaniéek p.1115], fr. [Arstph.], Thue. down; Sept. for ὌΞ; 1. avessel: Mk. xi. 16; Lk. viii. 16; Jn. xix. 29; Acts x. 11,16; xi. 5; 2 Tim. ii. 20; Rev. ii. 27; xviii. 12; τὰ ox. τῆς λειτουργίας, to be used in performing religious rites, Heb. ix. 21; σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν, unto honor, i. e. for honorable use, Ro. ix. 21; 2 Tim. ii. 21, (καθαρῶν ἔργων δοῦλα σκεύη. Sap. xv. 7); εἰς ἀτιμίαν, unto dishonor, i. e. for a low use (as, a urinal), Ro. ix. 21; σκεύη ὀργῆς, into which wrath is emptied, i. e. men appointed by God unto woe, hence the addition κατηρτισμένα εἰς ἀπώλειαν, Ro. ix. 22; σκεύη ἐλέους, fitted to receive mercy, —explained by the words ἃ προητοίμασεν eis δόξαν, ib. 23; τὸ σκεῦος is used of a woman, as the vessel of her husband, 1 Th. iv. 4 (see κτάομαι ; [al. take it here (as in 2 Co.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

σκεῦος, **a vessel” (Rom 9?! a/.). This common noun is used with a variety of applications, e.g. P Eleph 1451 (iii/B.c.) ἔκ τε κτηνῶν Kal σκενῶν, P Petr III. 107(@)i™ (ii/B.c.) fares are paid for the conveyance τῶν ᾿Αγήνορος σκενῶν, “οἵ Agenor’s furniture,” P Ryl 11. 138?3 (A.D. 34) ἐρίων σταθμία te kal ἕτερα σκεύη, “15. measures of wool, as well as other implements,” P Oxy I. 105% (A.D. 117-137) σκεύη καὶ ἔπιπλα, ‘‘movables and household stock,” P Tebt II. 38114 (A.D. 123) (= Selections, p. 78) σκεύηι kal ἐνδομενίαν καὶ ἱματισμόν, ‘utensils and household-stock and clothing,” and P Grenf II. 7714 (iii/iv a.D.) (= Se/ectzons, p. 120) χάριν τῶν σκευῶν αὐτοῦ, ‘on account of his goods.” For σκεῦος = ‘‘(a ship's) tackle,” as in Ac 2717, cf. P Cairo Zen I. 590317° (B.c. 258) ἀδύνατογ yap μοι δοκεῖ εἶναι ἄνευ τῶν ἀναγκαίων σκευῶν πλεῖν τὰ πλοῖα, and Sy// 537 (= %969)* (B.C. 347-6) σ]υνγραφαὶ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σκεῦος (skeuos) — vessel.

σκεῦος, εος, τό,

vessel or implement of any kind, in singular, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—but the plural is frequently used in a collective sense, all that belongs to a complete outfit, house-gear, utensils, chattels, opposed to live-stock and fixtures, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; σ. γεωργικά farming implements, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἱερὰ σ. sacred vessels and implements, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; a druggist's stores, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; σ. τὰ ἐπιτράπεζα table-furniture, [Refs]; military accoutrements, equipment, τὰ περὶ τὸ σῶμα σ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν ἵππων σ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; baggage of an army, and, generally, baggage, luggage, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὄνοι αὐτοῖς σκεύεσι packs and all, [Refs]; tackle, gear of ships, naval stores, etc., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ σκέα (σκεύη) τοῦ πλοίου [Refs 3rd c.BC+] (so, collectively, in singular…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

σκεῦος

skeuos

of uncertain affinity; a vessel, implement, equipment or apparatus

(literally or figuratively (specially, a wife as contributing to the

usefulness of the husband)):--goods, sail, stuff, vessel.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σκεῦος, ους, τό

n.n.

a vessel to contain liquid, utensil, tackle

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σκεῦος skeuos 23x

a vessel, utensil for containing anything, Mk. 11:16; Lk. 8:16; Rom. 9:21; any utensil, instrument; σκεύη, household stuff, furniture, goods, etc., Mt. 12:29; Mk. 3:27; the mast of a ship, or, the sail, Acts 27:17; met. an instrument, means, organ, minister, Acts 9:15; σκεύη ὀργῆς and σκεύη ἐλέους, vessels of wrath, or, of mercy, persons visited by punishment, or, the divine favor, Rom. 9:22, 23; the vessel or frame of the human…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

σκεῦος σκεῦος, ος, εος, τό, a vessel or implement of any kind, Ar., Thuc., etc.:—pl. in collective sense, furniture, house-gear, utensils, chattels, Ar.:—esp. of military accoutrements, equipment, Thuc., Xen.: baggage, luggage, Lat. impedimenta, Ar., Xen.:— the tackling or gear of ships, Xen., NTest.

an inanimate object, a thing, Plat.

metaph., τὸ σκεῦος, the body, as the vessel of the soul, NTest.; σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς a chosen vessel, of St. Paul, id. NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-APN — Noun · accusative · plural · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-APN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
43%vessel
vessel43% · 10×vessels26% · 6×goods13% · 3×article9% · 2×gear4% · 1×a vessel4% · 1×

23 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object44%subject30%adverbial13%predicate9%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 23 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,εἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἀναλαμβάνωI take up, raise
καταβαίνωI go down, come down
καίand, even, also,ὅραμαa spectacle, vis
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
καίand, even, also,
διαφέρωI carry through, dif
τὶς
αὐτός
καλύπτωI veil, hide, co
σκεῦος[the] vessels23×
what comes after →
αὐτός
ἁρπάζωI seize, snatch,διαρπάζωI plunder, rob tἐν
Article the
λειτουργίαa charitable gifγυναικεῖοςbelonging to womκεραμικόςof clay, made by
τὶς
ὡςas, like as, how
εἰς
Article theτιμήa price, honor
διά
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσκεῦος · 23× in the New Testament
Acts Revelation Romans 2 Timothy Luke Mark 1 Peter 1 Thessalonians 2 Corinthians Hebrews John Matthew
Across the New Testament12 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 139 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.102c. AD 40

διὰ τοῦθ’ εὑρήσεις τὴν σκηνὴν καὶ τὰ σκεύη πάντα αὐτῆς πρότερον μὲν ὑπὸ Μωυσέως, αὖθις δ’ ὑπὸ Βεσελεὴλ κατασκευαζόμενα·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.57c. AD 75–95

πολὺς γὰρ ὁ ἄργυρός τε καὶ χρυσὸς ἐγκατελήφθη ἐν τῷ στρατοπέδῳ καὶ σκεύη χαλκᾶ, οἷς ἐχρῶντο περὶ τὴν δίαιταν, πολὺ δὲ ἐπίσημον πλῆθος ἑκατέρων ὅσα τε ὑφαντὰ καὶ κόσμοι περὶ τὰς ὁπλίσεις ἥ τε ἄλλη θεραπεία καὶ κατασκευὴ ἐκείνων λεία τε παντοία κτηνῶν…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 7.3c. AD 100

γεγραμμένης ἐντολῆς: Ὃς ἂν μὴ νηστεύσῃ τὴν νηστείαν, θανάτῳ ἐξολεθρευθήσεται, ἐνετείλατο κύριος, ἐπεὶ καὶ αὐτὸς ὑπὲρ τῶν ἡμετέρων ἁμαρτιῶν ἔμελλεν τὸ σκεῦος τοῦ πνεύματος προσφέρειν θυσίαν, ἵνα καὶ ὁ τύπος ὁ γενόμενος ἐπὶ Ἰσαὰκ τοῦ προσενεχθέντος…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Athen.. 32Karanis? (Arsinoites)AD 39

μμθετου τῶν ἀπὸ Καρανίδος εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν μου ἀπηνέγκαντο ἱματισμὸν … πάντες βε … σκεύη καὶ ἐπήνεγκάν μοι πληγὰς πλείστας εἰς τὸ τυχὸν μέρος τοῦ σώματος … ἐπιθέντες τη

P.Lond. 2 p. 167-169 no. 177Bakchias (Arsinoites)AD 40

μου Ὀρσενούφι καὶ Σισοΐτι καὶ Πετοβάστι καὶ Μαρρῆτι καὶ τὰ ἐν τῆι οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ σκεύη τε καὶ ἕτερα τῇ μητρὶ ἡμῶν Ταοννώφρι ἐπὶ τὸν τῆς ζωῆς αὐτῆς χρόνον. ἐν

P.Mich. 5 322 aTebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 46

Ψύφι καὶ Ψενκήβκι πάντα ὅσα ποτὲ ἐὰν καταλείψῃ ὁ αὐτὸς Ψῦφις ὃς καὶ Ἁρποχρατίων σκεύη καὶ ἐπίπλοα καὶ ἐνδομενίαν καὶ ἐνοφειλόμενα καὶ κτήνη παντοῖα, ἑκάστῳ ὁμοίως κατὰ τὸ τρίτον

What if now desiring <the> God to show the wrath and to make known the power of Him bore with much patience [the] vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,
ὀργῆςorgē of wrath G3709 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
36× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
In the Bible, this word means God's strong anger or wrath towards sin, as seen in Romans 1:18 and Revelation 14:10. It's a desire for justice and a reaction against wrongdoing. This concept is also applied to human anger, like in Ephesians 4:31.
Amplified meaning
anger, judgment
Tyndale gloss
wrath
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὀργή (orgē) means anger, wrath, or passion. It is derived from a root meaning to swell or teem, indicating an internal agitation. In the New Testament, it describes both human anger and the divine reaction against sin, appearing in verses like Mark 3:5 and Romans 1:18. Lexicons note that it differs from θυμός (thymos), which refers to a more transient emotional state.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — θυμός, ὀργή, παροργισμός from a scan

Θυμός and ὀργή are found several times together in the N. T. (as at Rom. ii. 8; Ephes. iv. 31; Col. iii. 8; Rev. xix. 15); often also in the Septuagint (Ps. lxxvii. 49; Dan. iii. 13; Mic. v. 15), and often also in other Greek (Plato, Philebus, 47 6; Polybius, vi. 56. 11; Josephus, Antt. xx. 5. 3; Plutarch, De Coh. Ird, 2; Lucian, De Cal. 23); nor are they found only in the connexion of juxtaposition, but one made dependent on the other; thus θυμὸς τῆς ὀργῆς (Rev. xvi. 19; ef. Job iii. 17; Josh. vii. 26); while ὀργὴ θυμοῦ, not occurring in the N. T., is frequent in the Old (2 Chron. xxix. 10; Lam. i. 12; Isai. xxx. 27; Hos. xi.9). On one occasion in the Septuagint all the words of this group occur together (Jer. xxi. 5). When these words, after a considerable anterior history, came to settle down on the passion of anger, as the strongest of all passions, impulses, and desires (see…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὀργή, -ῆς, ἡ,

[in LXX chiefly for אַף, also for חָרוֹן, חֵמָה, קֶצֶף, etc.;]

impulse, propensity, disposition.

anger, wrath;

of men: Mk 3:5, Eph 4:31, Col 3:8, I Ti 2:8, Ja 1:19, 20;

of God;

that reaction of the divine nature against sin which in anthropomorphic language is called anger: Ro 1:18 9:22 12:19, (ICC, in l.), I Th 1:10 2:16, He 3:11 4:3(LXX), Re 14:10 16:19 19:15;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὀργή, -ῆς, 7, (fr. ὀργάω to teem, denoting an internal motion, esp. that of plants and fruits swelling with juice [Curtius § 152]; ef. Lat. turgere alicui for irasci alicui in Plaut. Cas. 2, 5,17; Most. 8, 2,10; οἵ. Germ. arg, Aerger), in Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod down the natural disposition, temper, character; movement or agitation of soul, impulse, desire, any violent emotion, but esp. (and chiefly in Attic) anger. In bibl. Grk. anger, wrath, indignation, (on the distinction between it and θυμός, see θυμός, 1): Eph. iv. 31; Col. iii. 8; Jas.i.19sq.; μετ᾽ ὀργῆς, indignant, [A. V. with anger], Mk. iii. 5; χωρὶς ὀργῆς, 1 Tim. ii. 8; anger exhibited in punishing, hence used for the punishment itself (Dem. or. in Mid. § 43): of the punishments inflicted by magistrates, Ro. xiii.4; διὰ τὴν ὀργήν, i. 6. because disobedience is visited with punishment, ib. 5. The ὀργή attributed to God in the N.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὀργή ‘“suddenly I open my eyes and see the twins in the school of Tothes,”’ 26. 441} (B.C. 153) ἐγὼ yap ἐνύπνια ὁρῶ πονηρά, followed by βλέπω Μενέδημον κατατρέχοντά pe, and 20. 45° (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski*, p. 85) ὁρῶ ἐν τῴ ὕπνῳ τὸν δραπέδην Μενέδημον ἀντικείμενον ἡμῖν. See also P Leid Wii. 26 (ji/ili A.D.) oé, τὸν αὐτογέννητον θεόν, τὸν πάντα (= δρῶντα καὶ πάντα ἀκούοντα, καὶ μὴ ὁρώμενον, and the iv/A.D. Christian sepulchral inser., P Hamb I. 225 Y]iz θεοῦ μεγάλοιο τὸν οὐδέποτ᾽ ἔδρακεν ἀνήρ: cf. Jn 115, I Tim 615: The meaning ‘‘see” with the mind, ‘‘perceive,’’ ‘‘ discern,” may be traced in such exx. as P Hib I. 444 (B.c. 253) ὁρῶντες δέ σε καταραθυμοῦντα Suny ϑεῖν kal νῦν ἐπιστεῖλαί σοι, ““Ῥαΐ seeing that you are negligent I thought it my duty to send to you instructions again now’ (Edd.), BGU IV. 1078" (A.D. 39) λοιπὸν οὖν, ἐὰν λάβω τὰ κερμάμια (/. κεράμια or κερμάτια), ὄψομαι, τί με…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὀργή (orgē) — wrath.

ὀργή, ἡ,

natural impulse or propensity (see. ὀργάω II): hence, temperament, disposition, mood, κηφήνεσσι κοθούροις εἴκελος ὀργήν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; so μείλιχος, γλυκεῖα ὀργά, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὠμή, ἀτέραμνος ὀργή, [Refs]; ὀργῆς νοσούσης εἰσὶν ἰατροὶ λόγοι of 'a mind diseased', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀστυνόμοι ὀργαί social dispositions, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also in Prose, διεπειρᾶτο αὐτῶν τῆς τε ἀνδραγαθίης καὶ τῆς ὀργῆς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐπιφέρειν ὀργάς τινι suit one's moods to another, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. anger, wrath, ὀργῇ χρῆσθαι to be in a passion, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὀργῇ εἶξαι, χαρίζεσθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+] involves anger, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὀργή

orge

from 3713; properly, desire (as a reaching forth or excitement of the

mind), i.e. (by analogy), violent passion (ire, or (justifiable)

abhorrence); by implication punishment:--anger, indignation,

vengeance, wrath.

see GREEK for 3713

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὀργή, ῆς, ἡ

n.f.

anger, wrath, passion

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὀργή orgē 36x

pr. mental bent, impulse; anger, indignation, wrath, Eph. 4:31; Col. 3:8; μετ’ ὀργῆς, indignantly, Mk. 3:5; vengeance, punishment, Mt. 3:7; Lk. 3:7; 21:23; Rom. 13:4, 5

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὀργή ὀργη, ἡ,

natural impulse or propension: one's temper, temperament, disposition, nature, Hes., Theogn., etc.; ἀλωπέκων ὀργαῖς ἴκελοι Pind.; ὀργαὶ ἀστυνόμοι social dispositions, Soph.; πρὸς τὰ παρόντα τὰς ὀργὰς ὁμοιοῦν Thuc., etc.

passion, anger, wrath, Hdt., Soph., etc.; ὀργῇ χάριν δοῦναι Soph.; ὀργῇ εἴκειν Eur.; δι᾽ ὀργῆς ἔχειν τινά Thuc.; ἐν ὀργῇ ἔχειν or ποιεῖσθαί τινα id. Thuc., etc.

Adverbial usages, ὀργῇ, in anger, Hdt., etc.; so, δι᾽ ὀργῆς, ἐξ ὀργῆς, κατ᾽ ὀργήν Soph.; μετ᾽ ὀργῆς Plat.

Πανὸς ὀργαί panic fears (i. e. terrors sent by Pan), Eur.:—but, ὀργή τινος anger against a person or at a thing, Soph.; ἱερῶν ὀργάς wrath at or because of the rites…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

→ (Anger, judgment, punishment)

→ See ANGER

→ See GOD, ANGER OF

→ See JUDGMENT

→ See PUNISHMENT, DIVINE

→ See PUNISHMENT, ETERNAL

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
72%wrath
wrath72% · 26×anger17% · 6×wrath?8% · 3×wrath!3% · 1×

36 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial42%subject31%object22%indirect object3%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 36 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἔρχομαιI come, goἀπόἐν
εἰς
ἔκδικοςavenging, an aveθεόςGod, a godβραδύςslow
μέλλωI am about to
Article the
καίand, even, also, nam
γῆthe earth, soil,θυμόςan outburst of p
μετά
αὐτός
ὀργήof wrath36×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godλαόςa people, the crArticle the
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀποκάλυψιςan unveiling, unθυμόςan outburst of pγνωρίζωI make known, de
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,
ἀλλάbut, except
καίand, even, also,εἰς
ἐγώ
εἰCond

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὀργή · 36× in the New Testament
Romans Revelation 1 Thessalonians Ephesians Colossians Hebrews James Luke 1 Timothy John Matthew Mark
Across the New Testament12 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 154 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 156c. AD 40

ἐφ’ ᾧ τὸν πατέρα χαλεπήναντα — ἡ γὰρ πρᾶξις ὀργῆς ἀξία, ἐπεὶ παρελθόντες τὸ ζωῆς ἀθανάτου φυτόν, τὴν ἀρετῆς παντέλειαν, ὑφ’ ἧς μακραίωνα καὶ εὐδαίμονα βίον ἐδύναντο καρποῦσθαι, τὸν ἐφήμερον καὶ θνητὸν οὐ βίον ἀλλὰ χρόνον κακοδαιμονίας μεστὸν εἵλοντο…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.58c. AD 75–95

τῆς μὲν οὖν ἐπὶ τῷ φόνῳ τιμωρίας αὐτὸν ἠφίει θυσίαν ἐπιτελέσαντα καὶ διʼ αὐτῆς ἱκετεύσαντα μὴ λαβεῖν ὀργὴν αὐτῷ χαλεπωτέραν, ἐπάρατον δʼ αὐτὸν ἐτίθει καὶ τοὺς ἐγγόνους αὐτοῦ τιμωρήσεσθαι κατὰ τὴν ἑβδόμην ἠπείλησε γενεάν, καὶ τῆς γῆς αὐτὸν ἐκείνης…

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 39.7c. AD 96

ἐπικάλεσαι δέ, εἴ τίς σοι ὑπακούσεται, ἤ εἴ τινα ἁγίων ἀγγέλων ὄψῃ: καὶ γὰρ ἄφρονα ἀναιρεῖ ὀργή.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. AD 5th c. AD
O.Did. 403DidymoiAD 110–AD 115

οὐκ ἐδυνάμην γὰρ ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης ἡμέρας ἀποστείλῃ τὸ δικότυλον ἐλαίου ἀλλὰ ὀργή με ἔλαβε ὅτι ἔπεμψας Μάξιμον καὶ … … εκπρασταμυ

P.Mich. 14 679AD 126–AD 175

εἰ μὴ μόνον περὶ τοῦ ὄνου Καρᾶτος. ὑμεῖς δὲ ἐφάνητέ με καιροτηροῦσαι καὶ εἰ ὀργή τις ἔνι ἐν τῷ με μηδὲν παραπέμψασθαι ἀκούσαντα, ἰδοὺ ἐπλήγην ὑπὸ ἵππου καὶ ἐκινδύνευσα

σὺν Ἀντωνίῳ τῷ προγεγραμμένῳ ἀδελφῷ … … τούτου καὶ τῆς περὶ αὐτὸν ἀμέτρου ὀργῆς … … σας· εἰς δὲ ἀπόδειξιν ὅτι κακοῦ βίου ε … … … -ηγήσαντος

What if now desiring <the> God to show the wrath and to make known the power of Him bore with much patience [the] vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,
κατηρτισμέναkatartizō fitted G2675 Verb · perfect · passive · participle · accusative · plural · neuter
13× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To complete or repair something, like fixing a net in Matthew 4:21, or to prepare someone for a task, as in Luke 6:40 and Hebrews 11:3.
Amplified meaning
fitted, made ready
Tyndale gloss
to complete
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καταρτίζω (katartizō) means to complete, repair, or prepare something thoroughly. It combines the ideas of mending and equipping, covering both literal and metaphorical uses, such as restoring a person to a right state of mind. The New Testament employs it in various contexts, including Matthew 4:21 and Galatians 6:1. Notably, there is some variation in interpretation regarding its ethical implications.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κατ-αρτίζω,

[in LXX chiefly in Pss (8:2 al.; כּוּן, etc.) and II Es (כְּלַל);]

to render ἄρτιος, i.e. fit, complete;

to mend, repair: Mt 4:21, Mk 1:19;

to furnish completely, complete, equip, prepare: pass., Lk 6:40, Ro 9:22, He 11:3; mid., Mt 21:16(LXX), He 10:5(LXX);

in ethical sense, to prepare, complete, perfect: Ga 6:1 (EV, restore), I Pe 5:10; pass.,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κατ-αρτίζω; fut. καταρτίσω (1 Pet. v. 10 LT Tr WII [Β. 37 (32); but Rec. καταρτίσαι, 1 aor. optat. 3 pers. sing.]); 1 aor. infxarapricat; Pass., pres. καταρτίζυμαι; pf. κατήρτισμαι; 1 aor. mid. 2 pers. sing. κατηρτίσω; prop. to render ἄρτιος i. 6. fit, sound, complete, [see κατά, III. 2}; hence a. ‘o mend (what has been broken or rent), to repair: τὰ δίκτυα, Mt. iv. 21; Mk. i. 19, [al. ref. these exx. to next head], i. q. to complete, τὰ ὑστερήματα, 1 Th. iii. 10. Ὁ. to fit out, equip, put in order, arrange, adjust: τοὺς αἰῶνας, the worlds, pass. Heb. xi. 3 (so, for PM, ἥλιον, Ps. Ixxiii. (Ixxiv.) 16; σελήνην, Ixxxviii. (Ixxxix.) 38); σκεύη κατηρτισμένη els ἀπώλειαν, of men whose souls God has so constituted that they cannot escape destruction [but see Mey. (ed. Weiss) in loc.], Ro. ix. 22 (πλοῖα, Polyb. 5, 46, 10, and the like); of the mind: κατηρτισμένος ὡς ete. so instructed…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

καταρτίζω occurs in P Tebt I. 67 (B.c. 140-39) καταρτισθῶσι and 20. 2445 (B.C. 117) KaTaptiodpe8a—both times in broken contexts. A good ex. of the original meaning ‘‘ prepare,” κε perfect” a thing for its full destination or use is afforded by P Oxy VIII. 1153!® (i/A.D.) where the recipient of the letter is informed that he will receive certain garments ἃ ἐδωρήσατό σοι ἸΤαυσανίας 6 ἀδελφός cov mpd πολλοῦ ἐκ φιλοτιμίας αὐτοῦ κατηρτισμένα, ‘which your brother Pausanias went to the expense of having made some time ago and presented to you” (Ed.). Cf. from the inserr. OG/S 17719 (B.C. 96-5) κατηρτίσατο δίδοσθαι. . πυροῦ ἀρτάβας, and similarly 179° (B.c. 95). Wynne in xf VII. viii. p- 282 ff. understands the verb in Mk 1! not of ‘‘mending” but of ‘‘folding” the nets to be ready for use, quoting an old Scholion where the Vg ‘‘ componentes”’ is explained as ‘“vel farcientes, vel…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καταρτίζω (katartizō) — to complete.

καταρτ-ίζω,

adjust, put in order, restore, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Μίλητος νοσήσασα στάσι, μέχρι οὗ μιν Πάριοι κατήρτισαν [Refs 1st c.AD+]; ἵνα καταρτισθῇ [ἡ πόλις] [NT+1st c.BC+]; set a dislocated limb, in passive, [Refs 1st c.BC+] form them by exercise, [Refs 2nd c.AD+], restore to a right mind, NT.Gal.6.1; [Refs 1st c.AD+]; reconcile, [Refs 4th c.AD+]; make good, [Refs]:—middle, [LXX].

II. furnish, equip, [Refs 2nd c.BC+] —passive, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; κατηρτισμένος absolutely, in battle array, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; instructed, NT.Luke.6.40; prepare, make ready, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]:—middle, [LXX+NT]: with infinitive, [Refs] (Egypt, 1st c.BC):—so in passive, [NT+1st c.BC+].

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καταρτίζω

katartizo

from 2596 and a derivative of 739; to complete thoroughly, i.e. repair

(literally or figuratively) or adjust:--fit, frame, mend, (make)

perfect(-ly join together), prepare, restore.

see GREEK for 2596

see GREEK for 739

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καταρτίζω

v.

I fit together, prepare

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καταρτίζω katartizō 13x

to adjust thoroughly; to knit together, unite completely, 1 Cor. 1:10; to frame, Heb. 11:3; to prepare, provide, Mt. 21:16; Heb. 10:5; to qualify fully, to complete in character, Lk. 6:40; Heb. 13:21; 1 Pet. 5:10; perf. pass. κατηρτισμένα, fit, ripe, Rom. 9:22; to repair, refit, Mt. 4:21; Mk. 1:19; to supply, make good…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

καταρτίζω fut. ίσω to adjust or put in order again, restore, Hdt.; κ. δίκτυα to put nets to rights, mend them, NTest.:—metaph. to restore to a right mind, id. NTest.

to furnish completely: perf. pass. part. κατηρτισμένος, absol., well-furnished, complete, Hdt., NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-RPP-APN — Verb · perfect · passive · participle · accusative · plural · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-RPP-APN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: peRfect Voice: Passive Mood: Participle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
8%fitted
fitted8% · 1×knit together8% · 1×do be perfected8% · 1×do restore8% · 1×supply8% · 1×you have prepared8% · 1×have been formed8% · 1×would he equip8% · 1×other renderings38% · 5×

13 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 13 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb92%subject8%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 13 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
πατήρfather, Father, πάσχωI am acted upon,
δέbut, on the other ha
εἰμίI am, existσῶμαbody, flesh
θηλάζωI give suck, suck
καίand, even, also,
πλοῖονa ship, vessel
Article the
διδάσκαλοςa teacher
Article the
καταρτίζωfitted13×
what comes after →
Article the
δίκτυονa fishing-netτοιοῦτοςὑστέρημαthat which is la
αἶνοςpraise
δέbut, on the other ha
πᾶςall, the whole,
εἰς
ἀπώλειαdestruction, rui
ἐν
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαταρτίζω · 13× in the New Testament
Hebrews Matthew 1 Corinthians 1 Peter 1 Thessalonians 2 Corinthians Galatians Luke Mark Romans
Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Ignatius of Antioch
Ignatius of AntiochThe Letters of Ignatius 1.2.2c. AD 110

πρέπον οὗν ἐστὶν κατὰ πάντα τρόπον δοξάζειν Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν τὸν δοξάσαντα ὑμᾶς, ἵνα ἐν μιᾷ ὑποταγῇ κατηρτισμένοι, ὑποτασσόμενοι τῷ ἐπισκόπῳ καὶ τῷ πρεσβυτερίῳ, κατὰ πάντα ἦτε ἡγιασμένοι.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
1st c. AD
P.Oxy. 8 1153OxyrhynchosAD 1–AD 100

ἓν πορφυροῦν ἃ ἐδωρήσατό σοι Παυσανίας ὁ ἀδελφός σου πρὸ πολλοῦ ἐκ φιλοτιμίας αὐτοῦ κατηρτισμένα, περὶ ὧν κομισάμενος ἀντίγραψον. ἀβόλλην σοι ἐὰν εὕρω ἀγοράσαι ἰδιωτικῶς ἐν τάχει πέμψω, ἐὰν

What if now desiring <the> God to show the wrath and to make known the power of Him bore with much patience [the] vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,
εἰςeis for G1519 Preposition
1,766× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means toward or into, indicating direction or purpose, as seen in Matthew 8:23 and Mark 1:45. It can also imply a sense of movement or action. The KJV translates it in various ways.
Tyndale gloss
toward
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰς is a preposition meaning 'into' or 'to,' used with the accusative case. It indicates direction, entrance, or limit, applicable to place, time, and figurative purposes. The New Testament frequently employs it to express movement toward locations or states, as seen in passages like Matthew 8:23. It can also denote relationships or results, such as 'for' or 'among.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰς,

prep. c. acc.,

expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, c. acc.).

Of place.

After verbs of motion;

of entrance into: Mt 8:23 9:7, Mk 1:45, Lk 2:15 8:31, al.;

of approach, to or towards: Mk 11:1, Lk 6:8 19:28, Jo 11:31 21:6, al.;

before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mk 4:7 8:19, 20, Lk 11:49, Jo 21:23, al.;

Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mt 8:18, 21:1, Mk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰς (eis) — toward.

ἐν εἰς

or ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is found in nearly all early Ionic dialect Inscrr. (except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and usually in Attic dialect Prose (except [Refs 5th c.BC+] is used before vowels for the sake of meter; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω), ἐς μακαρίαν. Aeolic dialect poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in Aeolic dialect εἰς, but spurious in Attic dialect-Ionic dialect) Radical sense into, and then more loosely, to:

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰς

eis

a primary preposition; to or into (indicating the point reached or

entered), of place, time, or (figuratively) purpose (result, etc.);

also in adverbial phrases:--(abundant-)ly, against, among, as, at,

(back-)ward, before, by, concerning, + continual, + far more

exceeding, for (intent, purpose), fore,

+ forth, in (among, at, unto, -so much that, -to), to the

intent that, + of one mind, + never, of, (up-)on, + perish, + set at

one again, (so) that, therefore(-unto), throughout, til, to (be, the

end, -ward), (here-)until(-to), ...ward, (where-)fore, with. Often

used in composition with the same general import, but only with verbs

(etc.) expressing motion (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰς

Prep.

into, in, among, till, for

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰς

into, to c. acc.

PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY. Radical sense, into, and then to:

OF PLACE, the commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Hom., etc.:—properly opposed to ἐκ, ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης from head to foot, Il.; εἰς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theocr.:—then, with all Verbs implying motion or direction, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, id. Il.:—in Hom. and Hdt. also c. acc. pers., where the attic use ὡς, πρός, παρά.

with Verbs which express rest in a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκε, i. e. he brought it into the house, and put it there, Od.; παρεῖναι ἐς τόπον to go to a place and be there, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

for (ki (conjunction), le, from 'el (preposition), and various other words. In the New Testament also the words are various, chiefly gar, kai gar, hoti (conjunctions); anti apo eis dia (accusative), epi (dative and accusative), peri (genitive), pros (genitive and accusative), huper (genitive) (prepositions)): the English Revised Version and the American Standard Revised Version give in many cases more literal or more accurate renderings than those in the King James Version.

In the New Testament the most important preps. from a doctrinal point of view are anti, "face to face," "over against," "instead," "on behalf of," peri, "around," "about," "concerning," huper, "over," "on behalf of." The first has been claimed as stating the substitutionary nature of Christ's sacrifice as contrasted with huper and peri, more frequently used of it. But, although anti in the New Testament often means…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%into
into33% · 595×to32% · 570×for10% · 185×in9% · 160×unto4% · 69×toward2% · 44×other renderings8% · 145×other renderings2% · 29×

1,797 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial95%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,766 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
βάλλωI cast, throw, rεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inδέbut, on the othe
εἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in, en
καίand, even, also,μήNegαὐτός
ἔρχομαιI come, go
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςοὗτος
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἐκκόπτωI cut out, cut oπόλιςa city
ἐγώ
εἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,δίδωμιI offer, give
εἰςfor1766×
what comes after →
Article the
αἰώνan age, a cycle οἶκοςa house, househoοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,οὗτος
ἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem
καίand, even, also,εἰςὅτιthat, since, bec
ὅς
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἄνDisj
σύ
καίand, even, also,μήNegἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰς · 1,766× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew John Mark Romans Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Peter 1 Corinthians Ephesians

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι ἧς

BGU 3 999Pathyris100 BC

καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

ος, βορρᾶ γῆ Σχώτου τοῦ Τρύφωνος, ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς γῆς, λιβὸς ἡ φέρουσα εἰς τὸ Κρόνειον ὁδός, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου Πέρσης τῆς

What if now desiring <the> God to show the wrath and to make known the power of Him bore with much patience [the] vessels of wrath fitted for destruction,
ἀπώλειαν,apōleia destruction, G684 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
18× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Destruction or loss, whether physical or eternal, as in Matthew 7:13 and 2 Peter 2:3, referring to perdition or waste.
Amplified meaning
loss, perdition
Tyndale gloss
destruction
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀπώλεια (apoleia) is derived from ἀπόλλυμι and encompasses meanings such as destruction, loss, and waste. It is used in the New Testament to refer to both physical and spiritual ruin, including the loss of eternal life, or perdition. Key verses include Matthew 7:13 and 2 Peter 2:1, where it contrasts with salvation.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀπώλεια, -ας, ἡ

(< ἀπόλλυμι),

[in LXX (Cremer, 797) for אבד, אֵיד, etc.;]

destruction, waste, loss, perishing (in π., of money, v. MM, s.v.): Mt 26:8, Mk 14:4, Ac 8:20, Ro 9:22, I Ti 6:9, II Pe 2:1; in special sense of the loss of eternal life, perdition, the antithesis of σωτηρία: Mt 7:13, Jo 17:12, Phl 1:28 3:19, II Th 2:3, He 10:39, II…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀπώλεια, -as, 9, (fr. ἀπόλλυμι, q- V-); 1. actively, a destroying, utter destruction: as, of vessels, Ro. ix. 22; τοῦ μύρου, waste, Mk. xiv. 4 (in Mt. xxvi. 8 without a gen.), (in Polyb. 6, 59, 5 consumption, opp. to τήρησις); the putting of a man to death, Acts xxv. 16 Rec.; by meton. a destructive thing or opinion: in plur. 2 Pet. ii. 2 Rec. ; but the correct reading ἀσελγείαις was long ago adopted here. 2. passively, a perishing, ruin, destruction; a. in general: τὸ ἀργύριόν σου σύν σοι εἴη εἰς ἀπ. let thy money perish with thee, Acts viii. 20; βυθίζειν τινὰ εἰς ὄλεθρον x. ἀπώλειαν, with the inelzde@ 9352. of apa misery, 1 Tim. vi. 9; αἱρέσεις ἀπωλείας destructive opinions, 2 Pet. ii. 1; ἐπάγειν ἑαυτοῖς ἀπώλειαν, ibid. cf. vs. 3. b. in particular, the destruction which consists in the loss of eternal life, eternal misery, perdition, the lot of those excluded from the kingdom of God…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀπώλεια. The weaker sense of a. is illustrated by P Tebt II. 276% acquired certain possessions ἐξωδιασμὸν αὐτῶν [ποιήσ]εται καὶ ἀπώλειαν, ‘will spend and lose them” (Edd.). Similarly in a series of nursing-contracts of the time of Augustus in BGU IV. we find the phrase ἐκτίνειν τὴν ἑκάστου ἀξίαν πλὴν συμφανοῦς ἀπωλείας, e.g. 1058") (= Chres¢. II. 170), 1106, a/. For the stronger meaning which we associate with NT usage, cf. the close of an ancient Coptic spell from the iii/A.D. Paris magical papyrus 224° (= Se/ections, p. 114) ἔξελθε δαῖμον, ἔπεί σε δεσμεύω δεσμοῖς ἀδαμαντίνοις ἀλύτοις, καὶ παραδίδωμί σε εἰς τὸ μέλαν χάος ἐν ταῖς ἀπωλίαις, ‘give you over to black chaos in utter…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀπώλεια (apōleia) — destruction.

ἀπώλεια, ἡ,

destruction, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II. loss, [Refs]; opposed to τήρησις, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; τῶν χρόνων ἀ.[Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II.2. perdition, [NT]

II.3. thing lost, [LXX]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀπώλεια

apoleia

from a presumed derivative of 622; ruin or loss (physical, spiritual

or eternal):--damnable(-nation), destruction, die, perdition, X

perish, pernicious ways, waste.

see GREEK for 622

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀπώλεια, ας, ἡ

n.f.

destruction, ruin, loss

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀπώλεια apōleia 18x

consumption, destruction; waste, profusion, Mt. 26:8; Mk. 14:4; destruction, state of being destroyed, Acts 25:6; eternal ruin, perdition, Mt. 7:13; Acts 8:20

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀπώλεια ἀπόλλυμι destruction, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

de-struk'-shun: In the King James Version this word translates over 30 Hebrew words in the Old Testament, and 4 words in the New Testament. Of these the most interesting, as having a technical sense, is 'abhaddon (from verb 'abhadh, "to be lost," "to perish"). It is found 6 times in the Wisdom Literature, and nowhere else in the Old Testament; compare Re 9:11. See ABADDON.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Destruction

In Job 26:6, 28:22 (Heb. abaddon) is sheol, the realm of the dead.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
79%destruction
destruction79% · 15×waste11% · 2×punishment5% · 1×destructive5% · 1×

19 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial39%subject28%predicate22%object11%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 18 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
τίςIrgυἱόςa son, descendenεἰς
εἰς
καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, existκαταρτίζωI fit together,
καίand, even, also, nam
ὄλεθροςruin, doom, destκρίσιςjudging, divine
ἔνδειξιςa showing, proof, de
αὐτός
τέλοςan end, purpose, tax
Article the
ἀπώλειαdestruction,18×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
πολύςmuch, many, ofteArticle the
οὗτος
Article the
ὑπάγωI go away, depart
καίand, even, also,
ἵναin order that, so th
Article the
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀπώλεια · 18× in the New Testament
2 Peter Matthew Philippians Revelation 1 Timothy 2 Thessalonians Acts Hebrews John Mark Romans
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 64 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn Husbandry 94c. AD 40

οὐκ εἰκότως οὖν Μωυσῆς ἐπὶ τῇ τῶν ἀναβατῶν ᾄδων ἀπωλείᾳ τοῖς ἱππεῦσιν εὔχεται σωτηρίαν παντελῆ;

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.97c. AD 75–95

κακοδαιμονεστέρους γὰρ ἐκείνων ἔσεσθαι καὶ χείρω κακίαν καταδικασθέντας, εἰ μὴ πρὸς τὸ παντελὲς εἶεν σεσωσμένοι, τηρηθεῖεν δʼ ἑτέρῳ κατακλυσμῷ, τοῦ μὲν πρώτου τὸν φόβον καὶ τὴν ἱστορίαν μαθόντες τοῦ δευτέρου δὲ τὴν ἀπώλειαν.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 57.4c. AD 96

ἐπειδὴ ἐκάλουν καὶ οὐχ ὑπηκούσατε, καὶ ἐξέτεινον λόγους καὶ οὐ προσείχετε, ἀλλὰ ἀκύρους ἐποιεῖτε τὰς ἐμὰς βουλάς, τοῖς δὲ ἐμοῖς ἐλέγχοις ἠπειθήσατε: τοιγαροῦν κἀγὼ τῇ ὑμετέρᾳ ἀπωλείᾳ ἐπιγελάσομαι, καταχαροῦμαι δὲ ἡνίκα ἂν ἔρχηται ὑμῖν ὄλεθρος καὶ ὡς…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
1st c. BC 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC undated 2nd c. AD
BGU 4 1108Alexandria6 BC

πιστευθῇ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων τοῦ παιδίου ὅταν ἀπαιτῆται ἢ ἐκτίνειν τὴν ἑκάστου ἀξίαν πλὴν συνφανοῦς ἀπωλείας, ἧς καὶ φανερᾶς γενηθείσης ἀπολελύσθω καὶ μὴ ἐγλείψειν τὴν τροφείαν ἐντὸς τοῦ χρόνου, ἐὰν

P.Ryl. 2 342 descr.AlexandriaAD 70–AD 71

αρσευπαιvestiges … … λθ … … ιον ανα … τησαι … … πλὴν συμφανοῦς ἀπωλείας καὶ μὴ ἐκλιπεῖν τὴν τροφείαν ἐντὸς τοῦ χρόνου … τουπ

P.Heid. 4 326Ankyron (Herakleopolites)AD 98

καὶ τὴν ἄλλην ὑπηρεσίαν ἀμέμπτως καὶ ἀνεγκλήτως, σῶα παραδιδοῦσαν ὅσα ἐὰν παραλάβῃ πλὴν συμφανοῦς ἀπωλείας καὶ βιαίου απαρ … … … … … τοῦ Ἰσιδώρου

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate